US20050075309A1 - Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C - Google Patents

Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20050075309A1
US20050075309A1 US10/900,008 US90000804A US2005075309A1 US 20050075309 A1 US20050075309 A1 US 20050075309A1 US 90000804 A US90000804 A US 90000804A US 2005075309 A1 US2005075309 A1 US 2005075309A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
alkenyl
alkynyl
acyl
independently
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/900,008
Inventor
Richard Storer
Gilles Gosselin
David Dukhan
Frederic Leroy
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique CNRS
Universite Montpellier 2 Sciences et Techniques
Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US10/900,008 priority Critical patent/US20050075309A1/en
Publication of US20050075309A1 publication Critical patent/US20050075309A1/en
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS INC. reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: STORER, RICHARD, LEROY, FREDERIC, DUKHAN, DAVID, GOSSELIN, GILLES
Priority to US12/270,795 priority patent/US8742101B2/en
Assigned to CENTRE NATIONAL DA LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE (CNRS) reassignment CENTRE NATIONAL DA LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE (CNRS) ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: GOSSELIN, GILLES
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ERRONEOUS ASSIGNMENT OF GILLES GOSSELIN TO IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 020956 FRAME 0192. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT ONLY OF RICHARD STORER, DAVID DUKHAN AND FREDERIC LEROY TO IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.. Assignors: STORER, RICHARD, LEROY, FREDERICK, DUKHAN, DAVID
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., THE CENTRE NATIONAL DEL LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFICQUE, L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CENTRE NATIONAL DEL LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE, IDENIX (CAYMAN) LIMITED, IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., IDENIX SARL, L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II
Priority to US14/269,003 priority patent/US9186369B2/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/044—Pyrrole radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/052—Imidazole radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/056—Triazole or tetrazole radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/23—Heterocyclic radicals containing two or more heterocyclic rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring system, not provided for in groups C07H19/14 - C07H19/22

Definitions

  • This invention is in the area of pharmaceutical chemistry, and, in particular, in the area of purine nucleosides, their syntheses, and their use as anti-Flaviviridae agents in the treatment of hosts infected with Flaviviridae and especially with Hepatitis C.
  • the Flaviviridae family of viruses comprises at least three distinct genera: pestiviruses, which cause disease in cattle and pigs; flaviviruses, which are the primary cause of diseases such as dengue fever and yellow fever; and hepaciviruses such as hepatitis C (HCV).
  • the flavivirus genus includes more than 68 members separated into groups on the basis of serological relatedness (Calisher et al., J. Gen. Virol, 1993, 70, 37-43). Clinical symptoms vary and include fever, encephalitis and hemorrhagic fever ( Fields Virology, Editors: Fields, B. N., Knipe, D. M., and Howley, P.
  • Flaviviruses of global concern that are associated with human disease include Dengue virus, hemorrhagic fever viruses such as Lassa, Ebola, and yellow fever virus, shock syndrome, and Japanese encephalitis virus (Halstead, S. B., Rev. Infect. Dis., 1984, 6, 251-264; Halstead, S. B., Science, 239:476-481, 1988; Monath, T. P., New Eng. J. Med., 1988, 319, 641-643).
  • the pestivirus genus includes bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV), classical swine fever virus (CSFV, also called hog cholera virus) and border disease virus (BDV) of sheep (Moennig, V. et al. Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 41, 53-98). Pestivirus infections of domesticated livestock (cattle, pigs and sheep) cause significant economic losses worldwide. BVDV causes mucosal disease in cattle and is of significant economic importance to the livestock industry (Meyers, G. and Thiel, H.-J., Advances in Virus Research, 1996, 47, 53-118; Moennig V., et al, Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 41, 53-98). Human pestiviruses have not been as extensively characterized as the animal pestiviruses. However, serological surveys indicate considerable pestivirus exposure in humans.
  • BVDV bovine viral diarrhea virus
  • CSFV classical swine fever virus
  • BDV border disease virus
  • Pestiviruses and hepaciviruses are closely related virus groups within the Flaviviridae family.
  • Other closely related viruses in this family include the GB virus A, GB virus A-like agents, GB virus-B and GB virus-C (also called hepatitis G virus, HGV).
  • the hepacivirus group (hepatitis C virus; HCV) consists of a number of closely related but genotypically distinguishable viruses that infect humans. There are approximately 6 HCV genotypes and more than 50 subtypes.
  • bovine viral diarrhea virus Due to the similarities between pestiviruses and hepaciviruses, combined with the poor ability of hepaciviruses to grow efficiently in cell culture, bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV) is often used as a surrogate to study the HCV virus.
  • BVDV bovine viral diarrhea virus
  • RNA viruses possess a single large open reading frame (ORF) encoding all the viral proteins necessary for virus replication. These proteins are expressed as a polyprotein that is co- and post-translationally processed by both cellular and virus-encoded proteinases to yield the mature viral proteins.
  • the viral proteins responsible for the replication of the viral genome RNA are located within approximately the carboxy-terminal. Two-thirds of the ORF are termed nonstructural (NS) proteins.
  • NS nonstructural
  • the mature nonstructural (NS) proteins in sequential order from the amino-terminus of the nonstructural protein coding region to the carboxy-terminus of the ORF, consist of p7, NS1, NS2A, NS2B, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, and NS5B.
  • NS proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses share sequence domains that are characteristic of specific protein functions.
  • the NS1 glycoprotein is a cell-surface protein that is translocated into the ER lumen.
  • NS1 was characterized initially as soluble complement-fixing antigen found in sera and tissues of infected animals, and now is known to elicit humoral immune responses in its extracellular form.
  • Antibodies to NS1 may be used to confer passive immunity to certain pestiviruses and flaviviruses.
  • NS1 has been implicated in the process of RNA replication where it is believed to have a functional role in the cytoplasmic processing of RNA.
  • NS2A is a small (approximately 22 kd) protein of unknown function.
  • NS2B also is a small (about 14 kd) protein that is membrane-associated, and is a required cofactor for the serine protease function of NS3, with which it forms a complex.
  • the NS3 proteins of viruses in both groups are large (about 70 kd), membrane-associated proteins that possess amino acid sequence motifs characteristic of serine proteinases and of helicases (Gorbalenya et al. (1988) Nature 333:22; Bazan and Fletterick (1989) Virology 171:637-639; Gorbalenya et al. (1989) Nucleic Acid Res. 17.3889-3897).
  • the NS3 proteins have enzymatic activity needed for processing polyproteins for RNA replication.
  • the C-terminal end of the NS3 proteins have an RNA triphosphotase activity that appears to modify the 5′ end of the genome prior to 5′-cap addition by guanylyltransferase.
  • NS4A and NS4B are membrane-associated, small (about 16 kd and about 27 kd, respectively), hydrophobic proteins that appear to function in RNA replication by anchoring replicase components to cellular membranes (Fields, Virology, 4 th Edition, 2001, p. 1001).
  • the NS5 proteins are the largest (about 103 kd) and most conserved, with sequence homology to other (+)-stranded RNA viruses. It also plays a pivotal role in viral replication.
  • the NS5B proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses are the enzymes necessary for synthesis of the negative-stranded RNA intermediate that is complementary to the viral genome, and of the positive-stranded RNA that is complementary to the negative-stranded RNA intermediate.
  • the NS5B gene product has Gly-Asp-Asp (GDD) as a hallmark sequence, which it shares with reverse transcriptases and other viral polymerases and which is predictive of RNA dependent RNA polymerase (RdRP) activity (DeFrancesco et al., Antiviral Research, 2003, 58:1-16).
  • GDD Gly-Asp-Asp
  • RdRP RNA dependent RNA polymerase
  • the NS5B enzyme products have the motifs characteristic of RNA-directed RNA polymerases, and in addition, share homology with methyltransferase enzymes that are involved in RNA cap formation (Koonin, E. V. and Dolja, V. V. (1993) Crit. Rev. Biochem. Molec. Biol. 28:375-430; Behrens et al.(1996) EMBO J. 15:12-22; Lchmannet al.(1997) J. Virol. 71:8416-8428; Yuan et al.(1997) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 232:231-235; Hagedorn, PCT WO 97/12033; Zhong et al.(1998) J. Virol.
  • the unliganded crystal structure of NS5B shows the unique structural feature of folding in a classic “right hand” shape, in which fingers, palm and thumb subdomains can be recognized (a feature it shares with other polymerases), but differs from other “half-open right hand” polymerases by having a more compact shapes due to two extended loops that span the finger and thumb domains at the top of the active site cavity (DeFrancesco et al. at 9).
  • the finger, thumb and palm subdomains encircle the active site cavity to which the RNA template and NTP substrates have access via two positively charged tunnels (Bressanelli et al., J. Virol., 2002, 76, 3482-92).
  • Finger and thumb domains have strong interactions that limit their ability to change conformation independently of one another, a structural feature shared by other RdRPs.
  • the thumb domain contains a ⁇ -hairpin loop that extends toward the cleft of the active site and may play a role in restricting the binding of the template/primer at the enzyme active site (DeFrancesco et al., at 10). Studies are in progress to determine the role of this loop in the initiation mechanism of RNA synthesis (Id.)
  • Palm domain geometry is highly conserved in all polymerases, and has a conserved two-metal-ion catalytic center that is required for catalyzing a phosphory transfer reaction at the polymerase active site.
  • RNA polymerization rather than a “copy back” mechanism, is utilized by pesti-, flavi- and hepaciviruses.
  • complementary RNA synthesis is initiated at the 3′-end of the genome by a nucleotide triphosphate rather than a nucleic acid or a protein primer.
  • Purified NS5B is capable of this type of primer-independent action, and the C-terminal ⁇ -loop is believed to correctly position the 3′-end of the RNA template by functioning as a gate that retards slippage of the RNA 3′-end through the polymerase active site (Hong et al., Virology, 2001, 285:6-11.
  • Bressanelli et al. reported the structure of NS5B polymerase in complex with nucleotides in which three distinct nucleotide-binding sites were observed in the catalytic center of the HCV RdRP, and the complex exhibited a geometry similar to the de novo initiation complex of phi 6 polymerase (Bressanelli et al., J. Virol., 2002, 76: 3482-92). Thus, de novo initiation occurs and apparently is followed by RNA elongation, termination of polymerization, and release of the new strand. At each of these steps is the opportunity for intervention and inhibition of the viral lifecycle.
  • NS3 serine proteinase is responsible for all proteolytic processing of polyprotein precursors downstream of its position in the ORF (Wiskerchen and Collett (1991) Virology 184:341-350; Bartenschlager et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:3835-3844; Eckart et al. (1993) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 192:399-406; Grakoui et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:2832-2843; Grakoui et al. (1993) Proc.
  • NS4A protein acts as a cofactor with the NS3 serine protease (Bartenschlager et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68:5045-5055; Failla et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68: 3753-3760; Lin et al. (1994) 68:8147-8157; Xu et al. (1997) J. Virol. 71:5312-5322).
  • the NS3 protein of both viruses also functions as a helicase (Kim et al. (1995) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 215: 160-166; Jin and Peterson (1995) Arch. Biochem. Biophys., 323:47-53; Warrener and Collett (1995) J. Virol. 69:1720-1726).
  • the NS5B proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses have the predicted RNA-directed RNA polymerases activity (Behrens et al.(1996) EMBO J. 15:12-22; Lchmannet al.(1997) J. Virol. 71:8416-8428; Yuan et al.(1997) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 232:231-235; Hagedorn, PCT WO 97/12033; Zhong et al.(1998) J. Virol. 72.9365-9369).
  • HCV hepatitis C virus
  • HCV Hepatitis B Virus
  • HCV is an enveloped virus containing a positive-sense single-stranded RNA genome of approximately 9.4 kb.
  • the viral genome consists of a 5′ untranslated region (UTR), a long open reading frame encoding a polyprotein precursor of approximately 3011 amino acids, and a short 3′ UTR.
  • the 5′ UTR is the most highly conserved part of the HCV genome and is important for the initiation and control of polyprotein translation.
  • Translation of the HCV genome is initiated by a cap-independent mechanism known as internal ribosome entry. This mechanism involves the binding of ribosomes to an RNA sequence known as the internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
  • IRS internal ribosome entry site
  • An RNA pseudoknot structure has recently been determined to be an essential structural element of the HCV IRES.
  • Viral structural proteins include a nucleocapsid core protein (C) and two envelope glycoproteins, E1 and E2.
  • HCV also encodes two proteinases, a zinc-dependent metalloproteinase encoded by the NS2-NS3 region and a serine proteinase encoded in the NS3 region. These proteinases are required for cleavage of specific regions of the precursor polyprotein into mature peptides: the junction between NS2 and NS3 is autocatalytically cleaved the NS2/NS3 protease, while the remaining junctions are cleaved by the N-terminal serine protease domain of NS3 complexed with NS4A.
  • the NS3 protein contains the NTP-dependent helicase activity that unwinds duplex RNA during replication.
  • NS5B contains the RNA-dependent RNA polymerase that is essential for viral replication ( Fields Virology, Fourth Edition, Editors: Fields, B. N., Knipe, D. M., and Howley, P. M., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa., 2001, Chapter 32, pp. 1014-1015).
  • NS5B is known to bind RNAs nonspecifically, and to interact directly with NS3 and NS4A that, in turn, form complexes with NS4B and NS5A (Id. @ 1015; Ishido et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res.
  • HCV-RdRP may have a strict specificity for 5′-triphosphates and 2′- and 3′-OH groups (Watanabe et al., U.S. 2002/0055483). Otherwise, the function(s) of the remaining nonstructural proteins, NS4A, NS4B, and NS5A (the amino-terminal half of nonstructural protein 5) remain unknown.
  • HCV-derived enzymes such as protease, helicase, and polymerase inhibitors are being developed.
  • Drugs that inhibit other steps in HCV replication are also in development, for example, drugs that block production of HCV antigens from the RNA (IRES inhibitors), drugs that prevent the normal processing of HCV proteins (inhibitors of glycosylation), drugs that block entry of HCV into cells (by blocking its receptor) and nonspecific cytoprotective agents that block cell injury caused by the virus infection.
  • ribozymes which are enzymes that break down specific viral RNA molecules
  • antisense oligonucleotides which are small complementary segments of DNA that bind to viral RNA and inhibit viral replication
  • Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. discloses branched nucleosides, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0050229 A1, 2004/0097461 A1, 2004/0101535 A1, 2003/0060400 A1, 2004/0102414 A1, 2004/0097462 A1, and 2004/0063622 A1 which correspond to International Publication Nos. WO 01/90121 and WO 01/92282.
  • a method for the treatment of hepatitis C infection (and flaviviruses and pestiviruses) in humans and other host animals is disclosed in the Idenix publications that includes administering an effective amount of a biologically active 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, administered either alone or in combination, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. See also U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2004/0006002 and 2004/0006007 as well as WO 03/026589 and WO 03/026675. Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in U.S. patent Publication No.
  • 2004/0077587 pharmaceutically acceptable branched nucleoside prodrugs, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in prodrugs. See also PCT Publication Nos. WO 04/002422, WO 04/002999, and WO 04/003000. Further, Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in WO 04/046331 Flaviviridae mutations caused by biologically active 2′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Biota Inc. discloses various phosphate derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection in International Patent Publication WO 03/072757.
  • Emory University and the University of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. discloses the use of 2′-fluoronucleosides for the treatment of HCV in U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,587. See also U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0198171 and International Patent Publication WO 99/43691.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) discloses the use of various 1,3-dioxolane nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. Pat. No. 6,566,365. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,340,690 and 6,605,614; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2002/0099072 and 2003/0225037, as well as International Publication No. WO 01/32153 and WO 00/50424.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) also discloses various other 2′-halo, 2′-hydroxy and 2′-alkoxy nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0019363 as well as International Publication No. WO 01/60315 (PCT/CA01/00197; filed Feb. 19, 2001).
  • ICN Pharmaceuticals, Inc. discloses various nucleoside analogs that are useful in modulating immune response in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,495,677 and 6,573,248. See also WO 98/16184, WO 01/68663, and WO 02/03997.
  • Pharmasset Limited discloses various nucleosides and antimetabolites for the treatment of a variety of viruses, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV, in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0087873, 2004/0067877, 2004/0082574, 2004/0067877, 2004/002479, 2003/0225029, and 2002/00555483, as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/32920, WO 01/79246, WO 02/48165, WO 03/068162, WO 03/068164 and WO 2004/013298.
  • Olsen et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16 th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p A76) also described the effects of the 2′-modified nucleosides on HCV RNA replication.
  • Drug-resistant variants of viruses can emerge after prolonged treatment with an antiviral agent. Drug resistance most typically occurs by mutation of a gene that encodes for an enzyme used in viral replication, and, for example, in the case of HIV, reverse transcriptase, protease, or DNA polymerase. It has been demonstrated that the efficacy of a drug against viral infection can be prolonged, augmented, or restored by administering the compound in combination or alternation with a second, and perhaps third, antiviral compound that induces a different mutation from that caused by the principle drug. Alternatively, the pharmacokinetics, biodistribution, or other parameter of the drug can be altered by such combination or alternation therapy. In general, combination therapy is typically preferred over alternation therapy because it induces multiple simultaneous pressures on the virus.
  • compositions for the treatment of pestivirus, flavivirus and hepatitis C virus infection include administering an effective amount of a beta-D or beta-L-nucleoside of the Formulae (I) and (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Bases (A)-(G) have a structure selected from the group consisting of: wherein
  • the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (I) is selected from the following, in any combination: X is O or S; R is H or phosphate; R 1 is H, CH 2 OH, or CONH 2 ; R 2 is OH or F; R 3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH 2 , Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R′′ independently is Cl, CN, CONH 2 or Me.
  • the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (II) is selected from the following, in any combination: X* is CH; R is H or phosphate; R 1 is H, CH 2 OH, or CONH 2 ; R 2 is OH or F; R 3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH 2 , Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R′′ independently is Cl, CN, CONH 2 or Me.
  • optional substituents are selected from the group consisting of one or more halogen, amino, hydroxy, carboxy and alkoxy groups or atoms, among others. It is to be understood that all stereoisomeric and tautomeric forms of the compounds shown are included herein.
  • the active compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination, alternation or sequential steps with another anti-HCV agent.
  • combination therapy effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially.
  • the dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • FIG. 1 show generalized structural depictions for Formula (I) and Formula (II) of the ribofuranosylnucleosides of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 shows generalized structures for the 2-azapurine bases of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 shows structural depictions for preferred bases of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides a compound, method and composition for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus and/or hepatitis C in humans or other host animals that includes administering an effective anti-pestivirus, anti-flavivirus or anti-HCV treatment amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside as described herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the compounds of this invention either possess antiviral activity, or are metabolized to a compound that exhibits such activity.
  • Flaviviruses included within the scope of this invention are discussed generally in Fields Virology, Editors: Fields, N., Knipe, D. M. and Howley, P. M.; Lippincott-Raven Pulishers, Philadelphia, Pa.; Chapter 31 (1996).
  • flaviviruses include, without limitation: Absettarov; Alfuy; AIN; Aroa; Bagaza; Banzi; Bououi; Bussuquara; Cacipacore; Carey Island; Dakar bat; Dengue viruses 1, 2, 3 and 4; Edge Hill; Entebbe bat; Gadgets Gully; Hanzalova; Hypr; Uheus; Israel turkey meningoencephalitis; Japanese encephalitis; Jugra; Jutiapa; Kadam; Karshi; Kedougou; Kokoera; Koutango; Kumlinge; Kunjin; Kyasanur Forest disease; Langat; Louping ill; Meaban; Modoc; Montana myotis leukoencephalitis; Murray valley encephalitis; Naranjal; Negishi; Ntaya; Omsk hemorrhagic fever; Phnom-Penh bat; Powassan; Rio Bravo; Rocio; Royal Farm; Russian spring-summer encephalitis; Saboya; St.
  • Pestiviruses included within the scope of this invention are also discussed generally in Fields Virology (Id.). Specific pestiviruses include, without limitation: bovine viral diarrhea virus (“VDV”); classical swine fever virus (“CSFV”) also known as hog cholera virus); and border disease virus (“DV”).
  • VDV bovine viral diarrhea virus
  • CSFV classical swine fever virus
  • DV border disease virus
  • HCV is a member of the family, Flaviviridae; however, HCV now has been placed in a new monotypic genus, hepacivirus.
  • Bases (A)-(G) have a structure selected from the group consisting of: wherein
  • the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (I) is selected from the following, in any combination: X is O or S; R is H or phosphate; R 1 is H, CH 2 OH, or CONH 2 ; R 2 is OH or F; R 3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH 2 , Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R′′ independently is Cl, CN, CONH 2 or Me.
  • the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (II) is selected from the following, in any combination: X* is CH; R is H or phosphate; R 1 is H, CH 2 OH, or CONH 2 ; R 2 is OH or F; R 3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH 2 , Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R′′ independently is Cl, CN, CONH 2 or Me.
  • optional substituents are selected from the group consisting of one or more halogen, amino, hydroxy, carboxy and alkoxy groups or atoms, among others. It is to be understood that all stereoisomeric and tautomeric forms of the compounds shown are included herein.
  • a compound of the Formula (III), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof is provided:
  • X is O or S. In another embodiment, X is O.
  • X is O or S. In another embodiment, X is O.
  • the active compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination, alternation or sequential steps with another anti-HCV agent.
  • combination therapy effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially.
  • the dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • nucleosides of the present invention have several chiral centers and may exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds may exhibit polymorphism. It is to be understood that the present invention encompasses any racemic, optically-active, diastereomeric, polymorphic, or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein. It being well known in the art how to prepare optically active forms (for example, by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase).
  • alkyl refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon of typically C 1 to C 10 , and specifically includes methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethybutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups.
  • Moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, including Cl, F, Br and I so as to form, for eg., CF 3 , 2-Br-ethyl, CH 2 F, CH 2 Cl, CH 2 CF 3 , or CF 2 CF 3 ; hydroxyl, for eg.
  • CH 2 OH amino, for eg., CH 2 NH 2 , CH 2 NHCH 3 , or CH 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 ; carboxylate; carboxamido; alkylamino; arylamino; alkoxy; aryloxy; nitro; azido, for eg., CH 2 N 3 ; cyano, for eg., CH 2 CN; thio; sulfonic acid; sulfate; phosphonic acid; phosphate; and phosphonate, either unprotected or protected as necessary, known to those skilled in the art, for eg., as taught in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition (1991), incorporated herein by reference.
  • lower alkyl refers to a C 1 to C 6 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, cyclic as in cyclopropyl, for eg., alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted forms. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • protected refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes. Numerous oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • aryl refers to phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl, and preferably phenyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • the aryl group can be substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, thio, alkylthio, carboxamido, carboxylate, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for eg., as taught in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition (1991), incorporated herein by reference.
  • alkaryl and “akylaryl” refer to an alkyl group with an aryl sustituent.
  • aralkyl and “arylalkyl” refer to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • halo as used herein includes bromo, chloro, iodo and fluoro.
  • purine base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, 2-azapurine bases that are optionally substituted imidazo-triazines, imidazo-pyridazines, pyrrolo-pyridazines, pyrrolo-triazines, triazolo-triazines including triazolo[4,5-d]triazines, pyrazolo-triazines including pyrazolo[4,5-d]triazines, N 6 -alkylpurines, N 6 -acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N 6 -benzylpurine, N 6 -halopurine, N 6 -vinylpurine, N 6 -acetylenic purine, N 6 -acyl purine, N 6 -hydroxyalkyl purine, N 6 -thioalkyl purine, N 2 -alkylpurines,
  • the Base maybe selected from the group consisting of:
  • acyl refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl; alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl; aralkyl including benzyl; aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl; aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or C 1 -C 6 alkoxy; sulfonate esters such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl; the mono-, di- or triphosphate ester; trityl or monomethoxytrityl; substituted benzyl; trialkylsilyl as, for eg., dimethyl-t-butylsilyl or diphenylmethylsilyl.
  • Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group.
  • the terms “substantially free of” and “substantially in the absence of” refer to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85-90% by weight, preferably 95%-98% by weight, and even more preferably 99%-100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside.
  • the compounds listed in the methods and compounds of this invention are substantially free of enantiomers other than for the one designated.
  • isolated refers to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85%-90% by weight, preferably 95%-98% by weight, and even more preferably 99%-100% by weight, of the nucleoside, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
  • both R′′s can be carbon, both R′′s can be nitrogen, or one R′′ can be carbon and the other nitrogen.
  • the term “host”, as used herein, refers to a unicellular or multicellular organism in which the virus can replicate, including cell lines and animals, and preferably a human. Alternatively, the host can be carrying a part of the flavivirus or pestivirus genome, whose replication or function can be altered by the compounds of the present invention.
  • the term host specifically refers to infected cells, cells transfected with all or part of the flavivirus or pestivirus genome and animals, in particular, primates (including chimpanzees) and humans. In most animal applications of the present invention, the host is a human patient. Veterinary applications, in certain indications, however, are clearly anticipated by the present invention such as in chimpanzees.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a nucleoside compound, which, upon administration to a patient, provides the nucleoside compound.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example, hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention.
  • prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on a functional moiety of the active compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, dephosphorylated to produce the active compound.
  • the compounds of this invention possess antiviral activity against flavivirus, pestivirus or HCV, or are metabolized to a compound that exhibits such activity.
  • nucleosides described herein can be administered as a nucleotide prodrug to increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleoside.
  • a number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known. In general, alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the mono-, di- or triphosphate of the nucleoside reduces polarity and allows passage into cells.
  • substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the phosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol, alcohols, acyl (including lower acyl); alkyl (including lower alkyl); sulfonate ester including alkyl or arylalkyl sulfonyl including methanesulfonyl and benzyl, wherein the phenyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents as provided in the definition of an aryl given herein; optionally substituted arylsulfonyl; a lipid, including a phospholipid; an amino acid residue or derivative; a carbohydrate; a peptide; cholesterol; or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group which, when administered in vivo, provides a compound wherein R 1 is independently H or phosphate. Many more are described in R. Jones and N. Bischoferger, Antiviral Research, 1995, 27:1-17. Any
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts are organic acid addition salts formed with acids, which form a physiological acceptable anion, for example, tosylate, methanesulfonate, acetate, citrate, malonate, tartarate, succinate, benzoate, ascorbate, ⁇ -ketoglutarate, and ⁇ -glycerophosphate.
  • Suitable inorganic salts may also be formed, including, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate, and carbonate salts.
  • salts may be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine
  • a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • Alkali metal (for example, sodium, potassium or lithium) or alkaline earth metal (for example calcium) salts of carboxylic acids can also be made.
  • the active nucleoside can also be provided as a 5′-phosphoether lipid or a 5′-ether lipid, as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference herein: Kucera, L. S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raen, Modest E. K., D. L. W., and C. Piantadosi. 1990. “Novel membrane-interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation.” AIDS Res. Hum. Retro Viruses. 6:491-501; Piantadosi, C., J. Marasco C. J., S. L. Morris-Natschke, K. L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J. R. Surles, K. S. Ishaq, L. S. Kucera, N. Iyer, C. A. Wallen, S. Piantadosi, and E. J. Modest. 1991.
  • Nonlimiting examples of U.S. patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at the 5′-OH position of the nucleoside or lipophilic preparations include U.S. Pat. No. 5,149,794 (Sep. 22, 1992, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,654 (Mar. 16, 1993, Hostetler et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,263 (Jun. 29, 1993, Hostetler et al.); all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • HCV drug-resistant variants of HCV can emerge after prolonged treatment with an antiviral agent. Drug resistance most typically occurs by mutation of a gene that encodes for an enzyme used in viral replication.
  • the efficacy of a drug against HCV infection can be prolonged, augmented, or restored by administering the compound in combination or alternation with a second, and perhaps third, antiviral compound that induces a different mutation from that caused by the principle drug.
  • the pharmacokinetics, biodistriution or other parameter of the drug can be altered by such combination or alternation therapy.
  • combination therapy is typically preferred over alternation therapy because it induces multiple simultaneous stresses on the virus.
  • HCV treatments described in the Background of the Invention can be used in combination or alternation with the compounds described in this specification.
  • Nonlimiting examples include:
  • Interferons are compounds that have been commercially available for the treatment of chronic hepatitis for nearly a decade. IFNs are glycoproteins produced by immune cells in response to viral infection. IFNs inhibit viral replication of many viruses, including HCV, and when used as the sole treatment for hepatitis C infection, IFN suppresses serum HCV-RNA to undetectable levels. Additionally, IFN normalizes serum amino transferase levels. Unfortunately, the effects of IFN are temporary and a sustained response occurs in only 8%-9% of patients chronically infected with HCV (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000).
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,980,884 to Blatt et al. discloses methods for re-treatment of patients afflicted with HCV using consensus interferon.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,942,223 to Bazer et al. discloses an anti-HCV therapy using ovine or bovine interferon-tau.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,636 to Alber et al. discloses the combination therapy of interleukin-12 and interferon alpha for the treatment of infectious diseases including HCV.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,696 to Chretien et al. discloses the use of thymosins, alone or in combination with interferon, for treating HCV.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,455 to Valtuena et al. discloses a combination HCV therapy employing interferon and a free radical scavenger.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,738,845 to Imakawa discloses the use of human interferon tau proteins for treating HCV.
  • Other interferon-based treatments for HCV are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,676,942 to Testa et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,372,808 to Blatt et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,696.
  • Ribavirin (1- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl-1-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxamide) is a synthetic, non-interferon-inducing, broad spectrum antiviral nucleoside analog. It is sold under the trade names VirazoleTM (The Merck Index, 11th edition, Editor: Budavari, S., Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J., p1304, 1989); Rebetol (Schering Plough) and Co-Pegasus (Roche).
  • VirazoleTM The Merck Index, 11th edition, Editor: Budavari, S., Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J., p1304, 1989
  • Rebetol Schering Plough
  • Co-Pegasus Roche.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 3,798,209 and RE29,835 disclose and claim ribavirin.
  • Ribavirin is structurally similar to guanosine, and has in vitro activity against several DNA and RNA viruses including Flaviviridae (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000).
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,211,771 discloses the use of ribavirin as an antiviral agent. Ribavirin reduces serum amino transferase levels to normal in 40% of patients, but it does not lower serum levels of HCV-RNA (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000). Thus, ribavirin alone is not effective in reducing viral RNA levels. Additionally, ribavirin has significant toxicity and is known to induce anemia.
  • Schering-Plough sells ribavirin as Rebetol® capsules (200 mg) for administration to patients with HCV.
  • the U.S. FDA has approved Rebetol capsules to treat chronic HCV infection in combination with Schering's alpha interferon-2b products Intron® A and PEG-IntronTM.
  • Rebetol capsules are not approved for monotherapy (i.e., administration independent of Intron®A or PEG-Intron), although Intron A and PEG-Intron are approved for monotherapy (i.e., administration without ribavirin).
  • Hoffman La Roche is selling ribavirin under the name Co-Pegasus in Europe and the United States, also for use in combination with interferon for the treatment of HCV.
  • Interferon products include Roferon-A (Hoffmann-La Roche), Infergen® (Intermune, formerly Amgen's product), and Weliferon® (Wellcome Foundation) are currently FDA-approved for HCV monotherapy.
  • Interferon products currently in development for HCV include: Roferon-A (interferon alfa-2a) by Roche, PEGASYS (pegylated interferon alfa-2a) by Roche, INFERGEN (interferon alfacon-1) by InterMune, OMNIFERON (natural interferon) by Viragen, ALBUFERON by Human Genome Sciences, REBIF (interferon beta-1a) by Ares-Serono, Omega Interferon by BioMedicine, Oral Interferon Alpha by Amarillo Biosciences, and Interferon gamma-1b by InterMune.
  • Protease inhibitors have been developed for the treatment of Flaviviridae infections. Examples, include, but are not limited to the following
  • Substrate-based NS3 protease inhibitors see, for example, Attwood et al., Antiviral peptide derivatives, PCT WO 98/22496, 1998; Attwood et al., Antiviral Chemistry and Chemotherapy 1999, 10, 259-273; Attwood et al., Preparation and use of amino acid derivatives as anti-viral agents, German Patent Pub. DE 19914474; Tung et al.
  • Inhibitors of serine proteases particularly hepatitis C virus NS3 protease, PCT WO 98/17679), including alphaketoamides and hydrazinoureas, and inhibitors that terminate in an electrophile such as a boronic acid or phosphonate (see, for example, Llinas-Brunet et al, Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogues, PCT WO 99/07734);
  • Non-substrate-based inhibitors such as 2,4,6-trihydroxy-3-nitro-benzamide derivatives (see, for example, Sudo K. et al., Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications, 1997, 238, 643-647; Sudo K. et al. Antiviral Chemistry and Chemotherapy, 1998, 9, 186), including RD3-4082 and RD3-4078, the former substituted on the amide with a 14 carbon chain and the latter processing a para-phenoxyphenyl group;
  • Phenanthrenequinones possessing activity against protease for example in a SDS-PAGE and/or autoradiography assay, such as, for example, Sch 68631, isolated from the fermentation culture broth of Streptomyces sp., (see, for example, Chu M. et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 1996, 37, 7229-7232), and Sch 351633, isolated from the fungus Penicillium griseofulvum, which demonstrates activity in a scintillation proximity assay (see, for example, Chu M. et al., Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters 9, 1949-1952); and
  • Selective NS3 inhibitors for example, based on the macromolecule elgin c, isolated from leech (see, for example, Qasim M. A. et al., Biochemistry, 1997, 36, 1598-1607). Nanomolar potency against the HCV NS3 protease enzyme has been achieved by the design of selective inhibitors based on the macromolecule eglin c.
  • Eglin c isolated from leech, is a potent inhibitor of several serine proteases such as S. griseus proteases A and B, ⁇ -chymotrypsin, chymase and subtilisin.
  • U.S. patents disclose protease inhibitors for the treatment of HCV.
  • Non-limiting examples include, but are not limited to the following.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 6,004,933 to Spruce et al. discloses a class of cysteine protease inhibitors for inhibiting HCV endopeptidase.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,276 to Zhang et al. discloses synthetic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus NS3 protease. The inhibitor is a subsequence of a substrate of the NS3 protease or a substrate of the NS4A cofactor.
  • restriction enzymes to treat HCV is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/008251 to Corvas International, Inc, and WO 02/08187 and WO 02/008256 to Schering Corporation.
  • HCV inhibitor tripeptides are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,534,523, 6,410,531, and 6,420,380 to Boehringer Ingelheim and WO 02/060926 to Bristol Myers Squibb.
  • Diaryl peptides as NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/48172 to Schering Corporation.
  • Iridazoleidinones as NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/08198 to Schering Corporation and WO 02/48157 to Bristol Myers Squibb.
  • WO 98/17679 to Vertex Pharmaceuticals and WO 02/48116 to Bristol Myers Squibb also disclose HCV protease inhibitors.
  • Thiazolidine derivatives for example, that show relevant inhibition in a reverse-phase HPLC assay with an NS3/4A fusion protein and NS5A/5B substrate (see, for example, Sudo K. et al., Antiviral Research, 1996, 32, 9-18), especially compound RD-1-6250, possessing a fused cinnamoyl moiety substituted with a long alkyl chain, RD4 6205 and RD4 6193;
  • Helicase inhibitors see, for example, Diana G. D. et al., Compounds, compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C, U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,358; Diana G. D. et al., Piperidine derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions thereof and their use in the treatment of hepatitis C, PCT WO 97/36554);
  • Antisense phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides complementary, for example, to sequence stretches in the 5′ non-coding region (NCR) of the virus (see, for example, Alt M. et al., Hepatology, 1995, 22, 707-717), or to nucleotides 326-348 comprising the 3′ end of the NCR and nucleotides 371-388 located in the core coding region of the HCV RNA (see, for example, Alt M. et al., Archives of Virology, 1997, 142, 589-599; Galderisi U. et al., Journal of Cellular Physiology, 1999, 181, 251-257).
  • Inhibitors of IRES-dependent translation see, for example, Ikeda N et al., Agent for the prevention and treatment of hepatitis C, Japanese Patent Pub. JP-08268890; Kai Y. et al. Prevention and treatment of viral diseases, Japanese Patent Pub. JP-10101591).
  • Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. discloses branched nucleosides, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0050229 A1, 2004/0097461 A1, 2004/0101535 A1, 2003/0060400 A1, 2004/0102414 A1, 2004/0097462 A1, and 2004/0063622 A1 which correspond to International Publication Nos. WO 01/90121 and WO 01/92282.
  • a method for the treatment of hepatitis C infection (and flaviviruses and pestiviruses) in humans and other host animals is disclosed in the Idenix publications that includes administering an effective amount of a biologically active 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, administered either alone or in combination, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. See also U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2004/0006002 and 2004/0006007 as well as WO 03/026589 and WO 03/026675. Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in U.S. patent Publication No.
  • 2004/0077587 pharmaceutically acceptable branched nucleoside prodrugs, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in prodrugs. See also PCT Publication Nos. WO 04/002422, WO 04/002999, and WO 04/003000. Further, Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in WO 04/046331 Flaviviridae mutations caused by biologically active 2′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Biota Inc. discloses various phosphate derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection in International Patent Publication WO 03/072757.
  • Emory University and the University of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. discloses the use of 2′-fluoronucleosides for the treatment of HCV in U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,587. See also U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0198171 and International Patent Publication WO 99/43691.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) discloses the use of various 1,3-dioxolane nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. Pat. No. 6,566,365. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,340,690 and 6,605,614; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2002/0099072 and 2003/0225037, as well as International Publication No. WO 01/32153 and WO 00/50424.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) also discloses various other 2′-halo, 2′-hydroxy and 2′-alkoxy nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0019363 as well as International Publication No. WO 01/60315 (PCT/CA01/00197; filed Feb. 19, 2001).
  • ICN Pharmaceuticals, Inc. discloses various nucleoside analogs that are useful in modulating immune response in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,495,677 and 6,573,248. See also WO 98/16184, WO 01/68663, and WO 02/03997.
  • Pharmasset Limited discloses various nucleosides and antimetabolites for the treatment of a variety of viruses, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV, in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0087873, 2004/0067877, 2004/0082574, 2004/0067877, 2004/002479, 2003/0225029, and 2002/00555483, as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/32920, WO 01/79246, WO 02/48165, WO 03/068162, WO 03/068164 and WO 2004/013298.
  • Olsen et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16 th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p A76) also described the effects of the 2′-modified nucleosides on HCV RNA replication.
  • miscellaneous compounds including 1-amino-alkylcyclohexanes (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,034,134 to Gold et al.), alkyl lipids (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,757 to Chojkier et al.), vitamin E and other antioxidants (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,757 to Chojkier et al.), squalene, amantadine, bile acids (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,964 to Ozeki et al.), N-(phosphonoacetyl)-L-aspartic acid (for example, U.S. Pat. No.
  • Hosts including humans, infected with pestivirus, flavivirus, HCV or another organism replicating through a RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase, can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
  • a preferred dose of the compound for pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV will be in the range from about 1 to 50 mg/kg, preferably 1 to 20 mg/kg, of body weight per day, more generally 0.1 to about 100 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day.
  • the effective dosage range of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs can be calculated based on the weight of the parent nucleoside to e delivered. If the salt or prodrug exhibits activity in itself, the effective dosage can be estimated as above using the weight of the salt or prodrug, or by other means known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compound is conveniently administered in unit any suitable dosage form, including but not limited to one containing 7 to 3000 mg, or 70 to 1400 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.
  • An oral dosage in one embodiment is 50-1000 mg.
  • the dosage form contains 0.5-500 mg; or 0.5-100 mg; or 0.5-50 mg; or 0.5-25 mg; or 1.0-10 mg.
  • the active ingredient should be administered to achieve peak plasma concentrations of the active compound of from about 0.2 to 70 ⁇ M, preferably about 1.0 to 10 ⁇ M. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of a 0.1 to 5% solution of the active ingredient, optionally in saline, or administered as a bolus of the active ingredient.
  • the concentration of active compound in the drug composition will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition.
  • the active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at varying intervals of time.
  • Oral compositions will generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They may be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets.
  • the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can e included as part of the composition.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes
  • a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide
  • the compound can be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, chewing gum or the like.
  • a syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
  • the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salts thereof can also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antibiotics, antifungals, anti-inflammatories, or other antivirals, including other nucleoside compounds.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, sucutaneous, or topical application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose.
  • the parental preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • preferred carriers are physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation.
  • Liposomal suspensions are also preferred as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811 (which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). For example, liposome formulations may be prepared by dissolving appropriate lipid(s) (such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol) in an inorganic solvent that is then evaporated, leaving behind a thin film of dried lipid on the surface of the container.
  • appropriate lipid(s) such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol
  • aqueous solution of the active compound or its monophosphate, diphosphate, and/or triphosphate derivatives is then introduced into the container.
  • the container is then swirled by hand to free lipid material from the sides of the container and to disperse lipid aggregates, thereby forming the liposomal suspension.
  • the nucleosides of the present invention can be synthesized by any means known in the art.
  • the synthesis of the present nucleosides can be achieved by either alkylating the appropriately modified sugar, followed by glycosylation or glycosylation followed by alkylation of the nucleoside, though preferably alkylating the appropriately modified sugar, followed by glycosylation.
  • the following non-limiting embodiments illustrate some general methodology to obtain the nucleosides of the present invention.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted lactone.
  • the lactone may be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution and cyclization techniques.
  • the lactone optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the protected lactone can then be coupled with a suitable coupling agent, such as an organometallic carbon nucleophile like a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R 6 —SiMe 3 in TAF with the appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, to give the 1′-alkylated sugar.
  • a suitable coupling agent such as an organometallic carbon nucleophile like a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R 6 —SiMe 3 in TAF with the appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, to give the 1′-alkylated sugar.
  • the optionally activated sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nuceleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in the appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the 1′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired.
  • the synthesis of a ribonucleoside is shown in Scheme 1.
  • deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside an optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction as, for example, via the Barton reduction.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted hexose.
  • the hexose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization (as, for example, via alkaline treatment), substitution and coupling techniques.
  • the hexose can be protected selectively to give the appropriate hexa-furanose, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • the 1′-OH optionally can be activated to a suitable leaving group such as an acyl group or a halogen via acylation or halogenation, respectively.
  • the optionally activated sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • a halo-sugar can be coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • the 1′-CH 2 —OH if protected, selectively can be deprotected by methods well known in the art.
  • the resultant primary hydroxyl can be reduced to give the methyl, using a suitable reducing agent.
  • the hydroxyl can be activated prior to reduction to facilitate the reaction, i.e., via the Barton reduction.
  • the primary hydroxyl can be oxidized to the aldehyde, then coupled with a carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R 6 —SiMe 3 in TAF with an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • the 1′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired.
  • the synthesis of a ribonucleoside is shown in Scheme 2.
  • deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside optionally can be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction as, for example, via the Barton reduction.
  • L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention can be prepared following the same general methods (1 or 2), beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted sugar with a 2′-OH and 2′-H, with an appropriate leaving group (LG), such as an acyl or halogen group, for example.
  • the sugar can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution, oxidation and/or reduction techniques.
  • the substituted sugar can then be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar.
  • Possible oxidizing agents are Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molydate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Jones' reagent a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids
  • Collins' reagent dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide
  • Corey's reagent
  • an organometallic carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R 6 —SiMe 3 in TAF with the ketone and an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, yields the 2′-alkylated sugar.
  • the alkylated sugar optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the optionally protected sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • a halo-sugar can e coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the 2′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 3.
  • a deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can e reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction. Modification of a Pre-Formed Nucleoside
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted nucleoside with a 2′-OH and 2′-H.
  • the nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard coupling techniques.
  • the nucleoside optionally can be protected with suitable protecting groups, preferably with acyl or silyl groups, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as described in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the appropriately protected nucleoside then can be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar.
  • oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molydate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • a 2′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 4.
  • the deoxyribonucleoside may be desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside optionally may be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
  • L-enantiomers are desired.
  • These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted sugar with a 3′-OH and a 3′-H, with an appropriate leaving group (LG) such as, for example, an acyl group or a halogen.
  • LG leaving group
  • the sugar can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution, oxidation and/or reduction techniques.
  • the substituted sugar then can be oxidized by an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 3′-modified sugar.
  • Possible oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molydate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Jones' reagent a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids
  • Collins' reagent dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide
  • Corey's reagent
  • an organometallic carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R 6 —SiMe 3 in TAF with the ketone and an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, yields the 3′-C-branched sugar.
  • the 3′-C-branched sugar optionally can e protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the optionally protected sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught in Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • a halo-sugar can be coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the 3′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 5.
  • a deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction. Modification of a Preformed Nucleoside.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted nucleoside with a 3′-OH and 3′-H.
  • the nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard coupling techniques.
  • the nucleoside can be optionally protected with suitable protecting groups, preferably with acyl or silyl groups, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the appropriately protected nucleoside can then be oxidized with the appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar.
  • oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molydate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the 3′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 6.
  • a deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
  • L-enantiomers are desired.
  • These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted pentodialdo-furanose.
  • the pentodialdo-furanose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution and cyclization techniques.
  • the pentodialdo-furanose is prepared from the appropriately substituted hexose.
  • the hexose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization (for eg., via alkaline treatment), substitution, and coupling techniques.
  • the hexose can be in either the furanose form or cyclized by any means known in the art, such as methodology taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994, preferably by selectively protecting the hexose, to give the appropriate hexafuranose.
  • the 4′-hydroxymethylene of the hexafuranose then can be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 4′-aldo-modified sugar.
  • oxidizing agents are Swern reagents, Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molybdate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxid
  • the pentodialdo-furanose optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • a suitable protecting group preferably with an acyl or silyl group
  • the protected pentodialdo-furanose then can be coupled with a suitable electrophilic alkyl, halogeno-alkyl (such as CF 3 ), alkenyl or alkynyl (i.e., allyl), to obtain the 4′-alkylated sugar.
  • the protected pentodialdo-furanose can be coupled with a corresponding carbonyl, such as formaldehyde, in the presence of a base like sodium hydroxide and with an appropriate polar solvent like dioxane, at a suitable temperature, and then reduced with an appropriate reducing agent to provide the 4′-alkylated sugar.
  • the reduction is carried out using PhOC(S)Cl and DMAP in acetonitrile at room temperature, followed by reflux treatment with ACCN and TMSS in toluene.
  • the optionally activated sugar can be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at room temperature.
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • the 4′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired.
  • a deoxyribonucleoside is desired.
  • the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent.
  • the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
  • L-enantiomers are desired.
  • These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • the title compound can be prepared according to the published procedure of Farkas and Sorm (J. Farkas and F. Sorm, “Nucleic acid components and their analogues. XCIV. Synthesis of 6-amino-9-(1-deoxy-beta-D-psicofuranosyl)purine,” Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun., 1967, 32:2663-7; and J. Farkas, Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun., 1966, 31:1535 (Scheme 7).
  • 2,8-diaza-3-deazaadenine derivative compounds may be prepared (see Scheme 13) according to the published synthesis by Chen et al. in J.Heterocyclic Chem., 1982, 285-88; however, no condensation of this compound with ribofuranose is found.
  • the compounds of the present invention can also be prepared by synthetic methods well known to those skilled in the art of nucleoside and nucleotide chemistry, such as taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • a representative general synthetic method is provided in Scheme 14.
  • the starting material is a 3,5-is-O-protected beta-D-alkyl ribofuranoside, but it will be understood that any 2′, 3′, or 5′-position may carry a protecting group to shield it from reacting.
  • the 2′-C—OH then is oxidized with a suitable oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-keto-modified sugar.
  • oxidizing agents are Swern reagents, Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO 2 , ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl 2 -pyridine, H 2 O 2 -ammonium molydate, NarO 2 —CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • a Grignard reagent such as, for example, an alkyl-, alkenyl- or alkynyl-magnesium halide like CH 3 MgBr, CH 3 CH 2 MgBr, vinylMgBr, allylMgBr and ethynylMgBr, or an alkyl-, alkenyl- or alkynyl-lithium, such as CH 3 Li, in a suitable organic solvent, such as, for example, diethyl ether or THF, across the double bond of the 2′-carbonyl group provides a tertiary alcohol at this position.
  • a suitable organic solvent such as, for example, diethyl ether or THF
  • LG leaving group
  • suitable solvent such as, for example, Hr in HOAc
  • LGs include C-1 sulfonates such as, for example, methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate and/or p-toluenesulfonate.
  • a metal salt (Li, Na or K) of an appropriately substituted 2-azapurine in a suitable organic solvent such as, for example, THF, acetonitrile of DMF results in the formation of the desired nucleosidic linkage and addition of the desired 2-azapurine base.
  • This displacement reaction may be catalyzed by a phase transfer catalyst like TDA-1 or triethylbenzylammonium chloride.
  • the introduction of a “Z” substituent on any of base formulae (i)-(vi) optionally may be performed subsequent to the initial addition of protecting groups.
  • an amino group for “Z” is accomplished by the addition of an appropriate amine in an appropriate solvent to the 2′-C-halo intermediate just prior to the last step of removal of the protecting groups.
  • Appropriate amines include alcoholic or liquid ammonia to generate a primary amine (—NH 2 ), an alkylamine to generate a secondary amine (—NHR), or a dialkylamine to generate a tertiary amine (—NRR′).
  • nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991. It is to be noted that this reaction scheme can be used for joining any of the purine nucleoside analogue bases provided for in Schemes 8-13 with a ribofuranosyl moiety.
  • test compounds were dissolved in DMSO at an initial concentration of 200 ⁇ M and then were serially diluted in culture medium.
  • HK-21 bay hamster kidney (ATCC CCL-10) and bos Taurus (T) (ATCC CRL 1390) cells were grown at 37° C. in a humidified CO 2 (5%) atmosphere.
  • HK-21 cells were passaged in Eagle MEM additioned of 2 mM L-glutamine, 10% fetal ovine serum (FS, Gibco) and Earle's SS adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate and 0.1 mM non-essential amino acids.
  • T cells were passaged in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium with 4 mM L-glutamine and 10% horse serum (HS, Gibco), adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate, 4.5 g/L glucose and 1.0 mM sodium pyruvate.
  • the vaccine strain 17D (YFV-17D) (Stamaril®, Pasteur Merieux) and Bovine Viral Diarrhea virus (BVDV) (ATCC VR-534) were used to infect HK and T cells, respectively, in 75 cm 2 bottles. After a 3 day incubation period at 37° C., extensive cytopathic effect was observed.
  • nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared: wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base.
  • an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
  • Step 1 2-azaadenine, NaH, ACN, rt, 24 hrs; Step 2: MeONa/MeOH
  • the starting material 2-azaadenine may be prepared starting from malonitrile by the synthesis taught by D. W. Wooley, Journal of Biological Chemistry, (1951), 189:401.
  • nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared: wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base.
  • an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
  • Step 1 H 2 O 2 , AcOH, 80%; Step 2: BnBr, DMAc, Step 3: NaOH, H 2 O, EtOH, 30%, Step 4: NH 3 /MeOH, 80° C., 2 days, 60%; Step 5: H 2 /Pd/C, 3 atm, MeOH, 30% Step 6: .NaNO 2 , AcOH, H 2 O, 50%.
  • 2-azaadenosine shown as the final product in Example 2.a. may be prepared starting with adenosine, according to the procedure of J. A. Montgomery, Nucleic Acid Chemistry, 1978, Part II, 681-685 starting with 2′-C-methyladenosine, or via 2-azainosine in a synthetic procedure taught by R. P. Panzica, Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, 1972, 9:623-628 starting with AICA riboside.
  • Step 1 NCS, DMF; Step 2: mcPBA, AcOH; Step 3: a) BnBr, DMAc; b) NaOH, H 2 O, EtOH, Step 4: NH 3 /MeOH, 80° C., Step 5: H 2 /Pd/C, MeOH; Step 6: NaNO 2 , AcOH, H 2 O.
  • nucleosides of Formulae (I) and (II) may be prepared: wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base.
  • an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
  • nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared: wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base.
  • an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
  • Step A 1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)-5-benzyloxymethylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • Step C 4-chloro-1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • Step D 4-amino-1- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • Step A 1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • Step B 4-chloro-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • Step C 4-amino-1-(2-C-methyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • the compound from Step B (590 mg, 0.96 mmol) was added to a solution of ammonia in methanol and stirred in a steel bomb at 150° C. for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to remove methanol. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water as eluant to give the title compound (35 mg) as a white powder.
  • Step A Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the protected 4,7-dichloroimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step B Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the 4,7-dichloroimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step C Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step D Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the chloro-methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step E Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step F Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the Protected 4,7-diazidoimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step G Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the azido-methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step H Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the amino-azido-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Step A 4-amino-6-bromo-7-( ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazine
  • the 2-azaadenosine [for preparation see Patent WO 01/16149. 2001] (70 mg, 0.26 mmol) was added to a solution of sodium acetate 0.5M (1.4 mL). The solution was heated until the 2-azaadenosine was solubilized. A solution of bromine (100 ⁇ L of Br 2 in 10 mL of water) (6.3 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 3 days. A second portion of the bromine's solution (6.3 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water/acetonitrile (9/1) as eluant to give the title compound as a yellow powder.
  • Step B 4-amino-6-methyl-7-( ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazine
  • Step A 7-( ⁇ -D-Ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazin-4-one
  • Step B 7-(2,3,5-Tri-O-acétyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazin-4-one
  • the 4-methylamino-7-( ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazine Va may be prepared according the following synthesis, where the starting material used is the AICAR I.
  • the AICAR may be prepared according to the published synthesis of Y. Yamamoto and N. Kohyama, Synthesis, 2003, 17:2639-2646.
  • the 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy- ⁇ -D-glycero-pentofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazine compounds IXa, IXb and IXc may be prepared according the following synthesis according to the published synthesis of R. Panzica and Co, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1999, 7:2373-2379.
  • the 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy- ⁇ -D-glycero-pent-2-ene-furanosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]- ⁇ -triazine derivative compounds XIa, XIb and XIc may be prepared according the following synthesis:
  • HepG2 cells are obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, Md.), and are grown in 225 cm 2 tissue culture flasks in minimal essential medium supplemented with non-essential amino acids, 1% penicillin-streptomycin. The medium is renewed every three days, and the cells are subcultured once a week.
  • confluent HepG2 cells are seeded at a density of 2.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells per well in a 6-well plate and exposed to 10 ⁇ M of [ 3 H] labeled active compound (500 dpm/pmol) for the specified time periods.
  • the cells are maintained at 37° C. under a 5% CO 2 atmosphere.
  • the cells are washed three times with ice-cold phosphate-buffered saline (PS).
  • Intracellular active compound and its respective metabolites are extracted by incubating the cell pellet overnight at ⁇ 20° C. with 60% methanol followed by extraction with an additional 20 ⁇ L of cold methanol for one hour in an ice bath. The extracts are then combined, dried under gentle filtered air flow and stored at ⁇ 20° C. until HPLC analysis.
  • the cynomolgus monkey is surgically implanted with a chronic venous catheter and sucutaneous venous access port (VAP) to facilitate lood collection and underwent a physical examination including hematology and serum chemistry evaluations and the body weight was recorded.
  • VAP chronic venous catheter and sucutaneous venous access port
  • Each monkey (six total) receives approximately 250 ⁇ Ci of 3 H activity with each dose of active compound at a dose level of 10 mg/kg at a dose concentration of 5 mg/mL, either via an intravenous olus (3 monkeys, IV), or via oral gavage (3 monkeys, PO).
  • Each dosing syringe is weighed efore dosing to gravimetrically determine the quantity of formulation administered.
  • Urine samples are collected via pan catch at the designated intervals (approximately 18-0 hours pre-dose, 0-4, 4-8 and 8-12 hours post-dosage) and processed. Blood samples are collected as well (pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 12 and 24 hours post-dosage) via the chronic venous catheter and VAP or from a peripheral vessel if the chronic venous catheter procedure should not be possible.
  • the blood and urine samples are analyzed for the maximum concentration (C max ), time when the maximum concentration is achieved (T max ), area under the curve (AUC), half life of the dosage concentration (T 1/2 ), clearance (CL), steady state volume and distribution (V SS ) and bioavailability (F).
  • Human one marrow cells are collected from normal healthy volunteers and the mononuclear population are separated by Ficoll-Hypaque gradient centrifugation as described previously by Sommadossi J-P, Carlisle R. “Toxicity of 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine and 9-(1,3-dihydroxy-2-propoxymethyl)guanine for normal human hematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro” Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 1987; 31:452-454; and Sommadossi J-P, Schinazi R F, Chu C K, Xie M-Y.
  • HepG2 cells are cultured in 12-well plates as described above and exposed to various concentrations of drugs as taught by Pan-Zhou X-R, Cui L, Zhou X-J, Sommadossi J-P, Darley-Usmer V M. “Differential effects of antiretroviral nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial function in HepG2 cells” Antimicro Agents Chemother 2000; 44:496-503. Lactic acid levels in the culture medium after 4 day drug exposure are measured using a Boehringer lactic acid assay kit. Lactic acid levels are normalized by cell number as measured by hemocytometer count.
  • Cells are seeded at a rate of between 5 ⁇ 10 3 and 5 ⁇ 10 4 /well into 96-well plates in growth medium overnight at 37° C. in a humidified CO 2 (5%) atmosphere. New growth medium containing serial dilutions of the drugs is then added. After incubation 5 for 4 days, cultures are fixed in 50% TCA and stained with sulforhodamine. The optical density was read at 550 nm. The cytotoxic concentration was expressed as the concentration required to reduce the cell numer by 50% (CC 50 ). The preliminary results are tabulated in the Table 3 below.

Abstract

This invention is directed to a method for treating a host, especially a human, infected with hepatitis C, flavivirus and/or pestivirus, comprising administering to that host an effective amount of an anti-HCV biologically active pentofuranonucleoside where the pentofuranonucleoside base is an optionally substituted 2-azapurine. The optionally substituted pentofuranonucleoside, or a salt or prodrug thereof, may be administered alone or in combination with one or more optionally substituted pentofuranonucleosides or other anti-viral agents.

Description

  • This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Applicaton No. 60/490,216, filed Jul. 25, 2003.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention is in the area of pharmaceutical chemistry, and, in particular, in the area of purine nucleosides, their syntheses, and their use as anti-Flaviviridae agents in the treatment of hosts infected with Flaviviridae and especially with Hepatitis C.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Flaviviridae Viruses
  • The Flaviviridae family of viruses comprises at least three distinct genera: pestiviruses, which cause disease in cattle and pigs; flaviviruses, which are the primary cause of diseases such as dengue fever and yellow fever; and hepaciviruses such as hepatitis C (HCV). The flavivirus genus includes more than 68 members separated into groups on the basis of serological relatedness (Calisher et al., J. Gen. Virol, 1993, 70, 37-43). Clinical symptoms vary and include fever, encephalitis and hemorrhagic fever (Fields Virology, Editors: Fields, B. N., Knipe, D. M., and Howley, P. M., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa., 1996, Chapter 31, 931-959). Flaviviruses of global concern that are associated with human disease include Dengue virus, hemorrhagic fever viruses such as Lassa, Ebola, and yellow fever virus, shock syndrome, and Japanese encephalitis virus (Halstead, S. B., Rev. Infect. Dis., 1984, 6, 251-264; Halstead, S. B., Science, 239:476-481, 1988; Monath, T. P., New Eng. J. Med., 1988, 319, 641-643).
  • The pestivirus genus includes bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV), classical swine fever virus (CSFV, also called hog cholera virus) and border disease virus (BDV) of sheep (Moennig, V. et al. Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 41, 53-98). Pestivirus infections of domesticated livestock (cattle, pigs and sheep) cause significant economic losses worldwide. BVDV causes mucosal disease in cattle and is of significant economic importance to the livestock industry (Meyers, G. and Thiel, H.-J., Advances in Virus Research, 1996, 47, 53-118; Moennig V., et al, Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 41, 53-98). Human pestiviruses have not been as extensively characterized as the animal pestiviruses. However, serological surveys indicate considerable pestivirus exposure in humans.
  • Pestiviruses and hepaciviruses are closely related virus groups within the Flaviviridae family. Other closely related viruses in this family include the GB virus A, GB virus A-like agents, GB virus-B and GB virus-C (also called hepatitis G virus, HGV). The hepacivirus group (hepatitis C virus; HCV) consists of a number of closely related but genotypically distinguishable viruses that infect humans. There are approximately 6 HCV genotypes and more than 50 subtypes. Due to the similarities between pestiviruses and hepaciviruses, combined with the poor ability of hepaciviruses to grow efficiently in cell culture, bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV) is often used as a surrogate to study the HCV virus.
  • The genetic organization of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses is very similar. These positive stranded RNA viruses possess a single large open reading frame (ORF) encoding all the viral proteins necessary for virus replication. These proteins are expressed as a polyprotein that is co- and post-translationally processed by both cellular and virus-encoded proteinases to yield the mature viral proteins. The viral proteins responsible for the replication of the viral genome RNA are located within approximately the carboxy-terminal. Two-thirds of the ORF are termed nonstructural (NS) proteins. The genetic organization and polyprotein processing of the nonstructural protein portion of the ORF for pestiviruses and hepaciviruses is very similar. For both the pestiviruses and hepaciviruses, the mature nonstructural (NS) proteins, in sequential order from the amino-terminus of the nonstructural protein coding region to the carboxy-terminus of the ORF, consist of p7, NS1, NS2A, NS2B, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, and NS5B.
  • The NS proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses share sequence domains that are characteristic of specific protein functions. For example, the NS1 glycoprotein is a cell-surface protein that is translocated into the ER lumen. NS1 was characterized initially as soluble complement-fixing antigen found in sera and tissues of infected animals, and now is known to elicit humoral immune responses in its extracellular form. Antibodies to NS1 may be used to confer passive immunity to certain pestiviruses and flaviviruses. NS1 has been implicated in the process of RNA replication where it is believed to have a functional role in the cytoplasmic processing of RNA. NS2A is a small (approximately 22 kd) protein of unknown function. Studies suggest that it binds to NS3 and NS5, and so may be a recruiter of RNA templates to membrane-bound replicase. NS2B also is a small (about 14 kd) protein that is membrane-associated, and is a required cofactor for the serine protease function of NS3, with which it forms a complex.
  • The NS3 proteins of viruses in both groups are large (about 70 kd), membrane-associated proteins that possess amino acid sequence motifs characteristic of serine proteinases and of helicases (Gorbalenya et al. (1988) Nature 333:22; Bazan and Fletterick (1989) Virology 171:637-639; Gorbalenya et al. (1989) Nucleic Acid Res. 17.3889-3897). Thus, the NS3 proteins have enzymatic activity needed for processing polyproteins for RNA replication. The C-terminal end of the NS3 proteins have an RNA triphosphotase activity that appears to modify the 5′ end of the genome prior to 5′-cap addition by guanylyltransferase.
  • NS4A and NS4B are membrane-associated, small (about 16 kd and about 27 kd, respectively), hydrophobic proteins that appear to function in RNA replication by anchoring replicase components to cellular membranes (Fields, Virology, 4th Edition, 2001, p. 1001).
  • The NS5 proteins are the largest (about 103 kd) and most conserved, with sequence homology to other (+)-stranded RNA viruses. It also plays a pivotal role in viral replication. The NS5B proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses are the enzymes necessary for synthesis of the negative-stranded RNA intermediate that is complementary to the viral genome, and of the positive-stranded RNA that is complementary to the negative-stranded RNA intermediate. The NS5B gene product has Gly-Asp-Asp (GDD) as a hallmark sequence, which it shares with reverse transcriptases and other viral polymerases and which is predictive of RNA dependent RNA polymerase (RdRP) activity (DeFrancesco et al., Antiviral Research, 2003, 58:1-16). Interestingly, it was found that the NS5B C-terminal 21 residue long hydrophobic tail is needed to target NS5B to the ER membrane, but its removal has no other effect and, in fact, leads to increased enzymatic solubility and activity (Tomei et al., J. Gen. Virol., 2000, 81:759-767; Lohmann et al., J. Virol., 1997, 71:8416-28; Ferrari et al., J. Virol., 1999, 73:1649-54).
  • The NS5B enzyme products have the motifs characteristic of RNA-directed RNA polymerases, and in addition, share homology with methyltransferase enzymes that are involved in RNA cap formation (Koonin, E. V. and Dolja, V. V. (1993) Crit. Rev. Biochem. Molec. Biol. 28:375-430; Behrens et al.(1996) EMBO J. 15:12-22; Lchmannet al.(1997) J. Virol. 71:8416-8428; Yuan et al.(1997) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 232:231-235; Hagedorn, PCT WO 97/12033; Zhong et al.(1998) J. Virol. 72.9365-9369). The unliganded crystal structure of NS5B shows the unique structural feature of folding in a classic “right hand” shape, in which fingers, palm and thumb subdomains can be recognized (a feature it shares with other polymerases), but differs from other “half-open right hand” polymerases by having a more compact shapes due to two extended loops that span the finger and thumb domains at the top of the active site cavity (DeFrancesco et al. at 9). The finger, thumb and palm subdomains encircle the active site cavity to which the RNA template and NTP substrates have access via two positively charged tunnels (Bressanelli et al., J. Virol., 2002, 76, 3482-92). Finger and thumb domains have strong interactions that limit their ability to change conformation independently of one another, a structural feature shared by other RdRPs. The thumb domain contains a β-hairpin loop that extends toward the cleft of the active site and may play a role in restricting the binding of the template/primer at the enzyme active site (DeFrancesco et al., at 10). Studies are in progress to determine the role of this loop in the initiation mechanism of RNA synthesis (Id.)
  • Nucleotidyl transfer reaction residues are located in the palm domain and contain the signature GDD motif (DeFrancesco et al., at 9). Palm domain geometry is highly conserved in all polymerases, and has a conserved two-metal-ion catalytic center that is required for catalyzing a phosphory transfer reaction at the polymerase active site.
  • It is believed that the de novo initiation model of RNA polymerization, rather than a “copy back” mechanism, is utilized by pesti-, flavi- and hepaciviruses. In the de novo initiation model, complementary RNA synthesis is initiated at the 3′-end of the genome by a nucleotide triphosphate rather than a nucleic acid or a protein primer. Purified NS5B is capable of this type of primer-independent action, and the C-terminal β-loop is believed to correctly position the 3′-end of the RNA template by functioning as a gate that retards slippage of the RNA 3′-end through the polymerase active site (Hong et al., Virology, 2001, 285:6-11. Bressanelli et al. reported the structure of NS5B polymerase in complex with nucleotides in which three distinct nucleotide-binding sites were observed in the catalytic center of the HCV RdRP, and the complex exhibited a geometry similar to the de novo initiation complex of phi 6 polymerase (Bressanelli et al., J. Virol., 2002, 76: 3482-92). Thus, de novo initiation occurs and apparently is followed by RNA elongation, termination of polymerization, and release of the new strand. At each of these steps is the opportunity for intervention and inhibition of the viral lifecycle.
  • The actual roles and functions of the NS proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses in the lifecycle of the viruses are directly analogous. In both cases, the NS3 serine proteinase is responsible for all proteolytic processing of polyprotein precursors downstream of its position in the ORF (Wiskerchen and Collett (1991) Virology 184:341-350; Bartenschlager et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:3835-3844; Eckart et al. (1993) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 192:399-406; Grakoui et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:2832-2843; Grakoui et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:10583-10587; Hijikata et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:4665-4675; Tome et al. (1993) J. Virol. 67:4017-4026). The NS4A protein, in both cases, acts as a cofactor with the NS3 serine protease (Bartenschlager et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68:5045-5055; Failla et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68: 3753-3760; Lin et al. (1994) 68:8147-8157; Xu et al. (1997) J. Virol. 71:5312-5322). The NS3 protein of both viruses also functions as a helicase (Kim et al. (1995) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 215: 160-166; Jin and Peterson (1995) Arch. Biochem. Biophys., 323:47-53; Warrener and Collett (1995) J. Virol. 69:1720-1726). Finally, the NS5B proteins of pestiviruses and hepaciviruses have the predicted RNA-directed RNA polymerases activity (Behrens et al.(1996) EMBO J. 15:12-22; Lchmannet al.(1997) J. Virol. 71:8416-8428; Yuan et al.(1997) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 232:231-235; Hagedorn, PCT WO 97/12033; Zhong et al.(1998) J. Virol. 72.9365-9369).
  • Hepatitis C Virus
  • The hepatitis C virus (HCV) is the leading cause of chronic liver disease worldwide. (Boyer, N. et al. J. Hepatol. 32:98-112, 2000). HCV causes a slow growing viral infection and is the major cause of cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma (Di Besceglie, A. M. and Bacon, B. R., Scientific American, Oct.: 80-85, (1999); Boyer, N. et al. J. Hepatol. 32:98-112, 2000). An estimated 170 million persons are infected with HCV worldwide. (Boyer, N. et al. J. Hepatol. 32:98-112, 2000). Cirrhosis caused by chronic hepatitis C infection accounts for 8,000-12,000 deaths per year in the United States, and HCV infection is the leading indication for liver transplantation.
  • HCV is known to cause at least 80% of posttransfusion hepatitis and a substantial proportion of sporadic acute hepatitis. Preliminary evidence also implicates HCV in many cases of “idiopathic” chronic hepatitis, “cryptogenic” cirrhosis, and probably hepatocellular carcinoma unrelated to other hepatitis viruses, such as Hepatitis B Virus (HBV). A small proportion of healthy persons appear to be chronic HCV carriers, varying with geography and other epidemiological factors. The numbers may substantially exceed those for HBV, though information is still preliminary; how many of these persons have subclinical chronic liver disease is unclear. (The Merck Manual, ch. 69, p. 901, 16th ed., (1992)).
  • HCV is an enveloped virus containing a positive-sense single-stranded RNA genome of approximately 9.4 kb. The viral genome consists of a 5′ untranslated region (UTR), a long open reading frame encoding a polyprotein precursor of approximately 3011 amino acids, and a short 3′ UTR. The 5′ UTR is the most highly conserved part of the HCV genome and is important for the initiation and control of polyprotein translation. Translation of the HCV genome is initiated by a cap-independent mechanism known as internal ribosome entry. This mechanism involves the binding of ribosomes to an RNA sequence known as the internal ribosome entry site (IRES). An RNA pseudoknot structure has recently been determined to be an essential structural element of the HCV IRES. Viral structural proteins include a nucleocapsid core protein (C) and two envelope glycoproteins, E1 and E2.
  • HCV also encodes two proteinases, a zinc-dependent metalloproteinase encoded by the NS2-NS3 region and a serine proteinase encoded in the NS3 region. These proteinases are required for cleavage of specific regions of the precursor polyprotein into mature peptides: the junction between NS2 and NS3 is autocatalytically cleaved the NS2/NS3 protease, while the remaining junctions are cleaved by the N-terminal serine protease domain of NS3 complexed with NS4A. The NS3 protein contains the NTP-dependent helicase activity that unwinds duplex RNA during replication. The hydrophobic carboxy-terminal 21 amino acids of nonstructural protein 5, NS5B, contains the RNA-dependent RNA polymerase that is essential for viral replication (Fields Virology, Fourth Edition, Editors: Fields, B. N., Knipe, D. M., and Howley, P. M., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa., 2001, Chapter 32, pp. 1014-1015). NS5B is known to bind RNAs nonspecifically, and to interact directly with NS3 and NS4A that, in turn, form complexes with NS4B and NS5A (Id. @ 1015; Ishido et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 1998; 244:35-40). Certain in vitro experiments using NS5B and guanosine 5′-mono-, di-, and triphosphate as well as 5′-triphosphate of 2′-deoxy- and 2′,3′-dideoxy-guanosine as HCV inhibitors suggest that HCV-RdRP may have a strict specificity for 5′-triphosphates and 2′- and 3′-OH groups (Watanabe et al., U.S. 2002/0055483). Otherwise, the function(s) of the remaining nonstructural proteins, NS4A, NS4B, and NS5A (the amino-terminal half of nonstructural protein 5) remain unknown.
  • A significant focus of current antiviral research is directed to the development of improved methods of treatment of chronic HCV infections in humans (Di Besceglie, A. M. and Bacon, B. R., Scientific American, Oct.: 80-85, (1999)).
  • Methods to Treat Flaviviridae Infections
  • The development of new antiviral agents for Flaviviridae infections, especially hepatitis C, is currently underway. Specific inhibitors of HCV-derived enzymes such as protease, helicase, and polymerase inhibitors are being developed. Drugs that inhibit other steps in HCV replication are also in development, for example, drugs that block production of HCV antigens from the RNA (IRES inhibitors), drugs that prevent the normal processing of HCV proteins (inhibitors of glycosylation), drugs that block entry of HCV into cells (by blocking its receptor) and nonspecific cytoprotective agents that block cell injury caused by the virus infection. Further, molecular approaches are also being developed to treat hepatitis C, for example, ribozymes, which are enzymes that break down specific viral RNA molecules, and antisense oligonucleotides, which are small complementary segments of DNA that bind to viral RNA and inhibit viral replication, are under investigation. A number of HCV treatments are reviewed by Bymock et al. in Antiviral Chemistry & Chemotherapy, 11:2; 79-95 (2000) and De Francesco et al. in Antiviral Research, 58: 1-16 (2003).
  • Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. discloses branched nucleosides, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0050229 A1, 2004/0097461 A1, 2004/0101535 A1, 2003/0060400 A1, 2004/0102414 A1, 2004/0097462 A1, and 2004/0063622 A1 which correspond to International Publication Nos. WO 01/90121 and WO 01/92282. A method for the treatment of hepatitis C infection (and flaviviruses and pestiviruses) in humans and other host animals is disclosed in the Idenix publications that includes administering an effective amount of a biologically active 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, administered either alone or in combination, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. See also U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2004/0006002 and 2004/0006007 as well as WO 03/026589 and WO 03/026675. Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in U.S. patent Publication No. 2004/0077587 pharmaceutically acceptable branched nucleoside prodrugs, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in prodrugs. See also PCT Publication Nos. WO 04/002422, WO 04/002999, and WO 04/003000. Further, Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in WO 04/046331 Flaviviridae mutations caused by biologically active 2′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Biota Inc. discloses various phosphate derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection in International Patent Publication WO 03/072757.
  • Emory University and the University of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. (UGARF) discloses the use of 2′-fluoronucleosides for the treatment of HCV in U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,587. See also U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0198171 and International Patent Publication WO 99/43691.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) discloses the use of various 1,3-dioxolane nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. Pat. No. 6,566,365. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,340,690 and 6,605,614; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2002/0099072 and 2003/0225037, as well as International Publication No. WO 01/32153 and WO 00/50424.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) also discloses various other 2′-halo, 2′-hydroxy and 2′-alkoxy nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0019363 as well as International Publication No. WO 01/60315 (PCT/CA01/00197; filed Feb. 19, 2001).
  • ICN Pharmaceuticals, Inc. discloses various nucleoside analogs that are useful in modulating immune response in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,495,677 and 6,573,248. See also WO 98/16184, WO 01/68663, and WO 02/03997.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 6,660,721; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/083307 A1, 2003/008841 A1, and 2004/0110718; as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/18404; WO 02/100415, WO 02/094289, and WO 04/043159; filed by F. Hoffmann-La Roche A G, discloses various nucleoside analogs for the treatment of HCV RNA replication.
  • Pharmasset Limited discloses various nucleosides and antimetabolites for the treatment of a variety of viruses, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV, in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0087873, 2004/0067877, 2004/0082574, 2004/0067877, 2004/002479, 2003/0225029, and 2002/00555483, as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/32920, WO 01/79246, WO 02/48165, WO 03/068162, WO 03/068164 and WO 2004/013298.
  • Merck & Co., Inc. and Isis Pharmaceuticals disclose in U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0147160, 2004/0072788, 2004/0067901, and 2004/0110717; as well as the corresponding International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/057425 (PCT/US02/01531; filed Jan. 18, 2002) and WO 02/057287 (PCT/US02/03086; filed Jan. 18, 2002) various nucleosides, and in particular several pyrrolopyrimidine nucleosides, for the treatment of viruses whose replication is dependent upon RNA-dependent RNA polymerase, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV. See also WO 2004/000858, WO 2004/003138, WO 2004/007512, and WO 2004/009020.
  • U.S. patent Publication No. 2003/028013 A1 as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 03/051899, WO 03/061576, WO 03/062255 WO 03/062256, WO 03/062257, and WO 03/061385, filed by Ribapharm, also are directed to the use of certain nucleoside analogs to treat hepatitis C virus.
  • Genelabs Technologies disclose in U.S. patent Publication No. 2004/0063658 as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 03/093290 and WO 04/028481 various base modified derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection.
  • Eldrup et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p. A75) described the structure activity relationship of 2′-modified nucleosides for inhibition of HCV.
  • Bhat et al (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.); p A75) describe the synthesis and pharmacokinetic properties of nucleoside analogues as possible inhibitors of HCV RNA replication. The authors report that 2′-modified nucleosides demonstrate potent inhibitory activity in cell-based replicon assays.
  • Olsen et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p A76) also described the effects of the 2′-modified nucleosides on HCV RNA replication.
  • Drug-resistant variants of viruses can emerge after prolonged treatment with an antiviral agent. Drug resistance most typically occurs by mutation of a gene that encodes for an enzyme used in viral replication, and, for example, in the case of HIV, reverse transcriptase, protease, or DNA polymerase. It has been demonstrated that the efficacy of a drug against viral infection can be prolonged, augmented, or restored by administering the compound in combination or alternation with a second, and perhaps third, antiviral compound that induces a different mutation from that caused by the principle drug. Alternatively, the pharmacokinetics, biodistribution, or other parameter of the drug can be altered by such combination or alternation therapy. In general, combination therapy is typically preferred over alternation therapy because it induces multiple simultaneous pressures on the virus. One cannot predict, however, what mutations will be induced in the viral genome by a given drug, whether the mutation is permanent or transient, or how an infected cell with a mutated viral sequence will respond to therapy with other agents in combination or alternation. This is exacerbated by the fact that there is a paucity of data on the kinetics of drug resistance in long-term cell cultures treated with modern antiviral agents.
  • In view of the severity of diseases associated with pestiviruses, flaviviruses, and hepatitis C virus, and their pervasiveness in animals and humans, it is an object of the present invention to provide a compound, method and composition for the treatment of a host infected with any member of the family Flaviviridae, including hepatitis C virus.
  • Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a compound, method and pharmaceutically-acceptable composition for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of a host, and particularly a human, infected with any member of the family Flaviviridae.
  • Further, given the rising threat of other Flaviviridae infections, there remains a strong need to provide new effective pharmaceutical agents that have low toxicity to the host.
  • Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a compound, method and composition for the treatment of a host infected with any member of the family Flaviviridae, including hepatitis C virus, that have low toxicity to the host.
  • It is another object of the present invention to provide a compound, method and composition generally for the treatment of patients infected with pestiviruses, flaviviruses, or hepaciviruses.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Methods and compositions for the treatment of pestivirus, flavivirus and hepatitis C virus infection are described that include administering an effective amount of a beta-D or beta-L-nucleoside of the Formulae (I) and (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • In a first principal embodiment, a compound of the Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00001
    wherein
      • each R is independently H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
      • n is 0-2;
      • when X is CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, CH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
      • when X is O, S[O]n, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), halogenated alkyl, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —C(H)═N—NH2, C(S)NH2, C(S)NH(alkyl), or C(S)N(alkyl)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
      • each R2 and R3 is independently H, OH, NH2, SH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)NH2, NC, C(O)OH, SCN, OCN, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
      • each R2′ and R3′ is independently H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
      • Base is selected from the group consisting of:
        Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00002
        wherein:
      • each A independently is N or C—R5;
      • each W is H, OH, —O(acyl), —O(C14 alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)R4R4, —OC(O)N R4R4, SH, —S(acyl), —S(C1-4 alkyl), NH2, NH(acyl), N(acyl)2, NH(C1-4 alkyl), N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —N(cycloalkyl) C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1I4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, N3, NO2, NH═NH2, N3, NHOH, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(acyl), —C(O)N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH(C1-4 alkyl), —C(O)N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —C(O)N(alkyl)(acyl), or halogenated alkyl;
      • each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2;
      • each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
      • each R5 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, I, CN, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, carboxy, C(═NH)NH2, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 alkyloxycarbonyl, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NO2, N3, halogenated alkyl especially CF3, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, C1-6 alkoxy, SH, —S(C1-4 alkyl), —S(C1-4 alkenyl), —S(C1-4 alkynyl), C1-6 alkylthio, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl, C3-6 cycloalkylamino-alkenyl, -alkynyl, —(O)alkyl, —(O)alkenyl, —(O)alkynyl, —(O)acyl, —O(C1-4 alkyl), —O(C1-4 alkenyl), —O(C1-4 alkynyl), —O—C(O)NH2, —OC(O)N(alkyl), —OC(O)R′R″, —C(O)OH, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-alkenyl, C(O)O-alkynyl, S-alkyl, S-acyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, SCN, OCN, NC, —C(O)—NH2, C(O)NH(alkyl), C(O)N(alkyl)2, C(O)NH(acyl), C(O)N(acyl)2, (S)—NH2, NH-alkyl, N(dialkyl)2, NH-acyl, N-diacyl, or a 3-7 membered heterocycle having O, S, or N taken independently in any combination;
      • each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2 6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, or (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl; and
      • all tautomeric, enantiomeric and stereoisomeric forms thereof;
      • with the caveat that when X is S in Formula (I), then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one.
  • In a second principal embodiment, a compound of the Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00003
    wherein:
      • R, R2, R2′, R3, and R3′ are all as defined above;
      • X* is CY3;
      • Y3 is hydrogen, alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, azido, cyano, alkenyl, alkynyl, —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), CF3, —CONH2, —CONH(alkyl), or —CON(alkyl)2;
      • R1 is H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), or —C(O)N(alkyl)2, wherein an optional substitution on alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may be one or more halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy or alkylthio groups taken in any combination;
      • Base is defined as above for formulae (A)-(G); and
      • all tautomeric, enantiomeric and stereoisomeric forms thereof;
      • with the caveat that when X is S in Formula (I), then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one.
  • In preferred embodiments, Bases (A)-(G) have a structure selected from the group consisting of:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00004
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00005
    wherein
      • each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, CN4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl, as provided above in the definitions of A and Z for the Base Formulae (A)-(G);
      • each W is independently H, Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S—alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
      • each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
      • each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
  • In its preferred embodiments, the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (I) is selected from the following, in any combination: X is O or S; R is H or phosphate; R1 is H, CH2OH, or CONH2; R2 is OH or F; R3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH2, Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R″ independently is Cl, CN, CONH2 or Me.
  • In its preferred embodiments for Formula (II), the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (II) is selected from the following, in any combination: X* is CH; R is H or phosphate; R1 is H, CH2OH, or CONH2; R2 is OH or F; R3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH2, Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R″ independently is Cl, CN, CONH2 or Me.
  • In all embodiments, optional substituents are selected from the group consisting of one or more halogen, amino, hydroxy, carboxy and alkoxy groups or atoms, among others. It is to be understood that all stereoisomeric and tautomeric forms of the compounds shown are included herein.
  • The active compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination, alternation or sequential steps with another anti-HCV agent. In combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially. The dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 show generalized structural depictions for Formula (I) and Formula (II) of the ribofuranosylnucleosides of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 shows generalized structures for the 2-azapurine bases of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 shows structural depictions for preferred bases of the present invention.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides a compound, method and composition for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus and/or hepatitis C in humans or other host animals that includes administering an effective anti-pestivirus, anti-flavivirus or anti-HCV treatment amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside as described herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The compounds of this invention either possess antiviral activity, or are metabolized to a compound that exhibits such activity.
  • Flaviviruses included within the scope of this invention are discussed generally in Fields Virology, Editors: Fields, N., Knipe, D. M. and Howley, P. M.; Lippincott-Raven Pulishers, Philadelphia, Pa.; Chapter 31 (1996). Specific flaviviruses include, without limitation: Absettarov; Alfuy; Apoi; Aroa; Bagaza; Banzi; Bououi; Bussuquara; Cacipacore; Carey Island; Dakar bat; Dengue viruses 1, 2, 3 and 4; Edge Hill; Entebbe bat; Gadgets Gully; Hanzalova; Hypr; Uheus; Israel turkey meningoencephalitis; Japanese encephalitis; Jugra; Jutiapa; Kadam; Karshi; Kedougou; Kokoera; Koutango; Kumlinge; Kunjin; Kyasanur Forest disease; Langat; Louping ill; Meaban; Modoc; Montana myotis leukoencephalitis; Murray valley encephalitis; Naranjal; Negishi; Ntaya; Omsk hemorrhagic fever; Phnom-Penh bat; Powassan; Rio Bravo; Rocio; Royal Farm; Russian spring-summer encephalitis; Saboya; St. Louis encephalitis; Sal Vieja; San Perlita; Saumarez Reef; Sepik; Sokuluk; Spondweni; Stratford; Temusu; Tyuleniy; Uganda S, Usutu, Wesselsbron; West Nile; Yaounde; Yellow fever; and Zika.
  • Pestiviruses included within the scope of this invention are also discussed generally in Fields Virology (Id.). Specific pestiviruses include, without limitation: bovine viral diarrhea virus (“VDV”); classical swine fever virus (“CSFV”) also known as hog cholera virus); and border disease virus (“DV”).
  • HCV is a member of the family, Flaviviridae; however, HCV now has been placed in a new monotypic genus, hepacivirus.
  • Active Compounds, Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts and Prodrugs Thereof
  • In a first principal embodiment, a compound of the Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00006
    wherein
      • R is H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
      • n is 0-2;
      • when X is CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, CH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
      • when X is O, S[O]n, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), halogenated alkyl, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —C(H)═N—NH2, C(S)NH2, C(S)NH(alkyl), or C(S)N(alkyl)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
      • each R2 and R3 is independently is OH, NH2, SH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)NH2, NC, C(O)OH, SCN, OCN, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
      • each R2′ and R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
      • Base is selected from the group consisting of:
        Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00007
        wherein
      • each A independently is N or C—R5;
      • W is H, OH, —O(acyl), —O(C1-4 alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)R4R4, —OC(O)N R4R4, SH, —S(acyl), —S(C1-4 alkyl), NH2, NH(acyl), N(acyl)2, NH(C1-4 alkyl), N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —N(cycloalkyl) C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, N3, NO2, NH═NH2, N3, NHOH, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(acyl), —C(O)N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH(C1-4 alkyl), —C(O)N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —C(O)N(alkyl)(acyl), or halogenated alkyl;
      • Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2;
      • each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
      • each R5 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, I, CN, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, carboxy, C(═NH)NH2, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 alkyloxycarbonyl, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NO2, N3, halogenated alkyl especially CF3, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, C1-6 alkoxy, SH, -$(C1-4 alkyl), —S(C1-4 alkenyl), —S(C1-4 alkynyl), C1-6 alkylthio, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl, C3-6 cycloalkylamino-alkenyl, -alkynyl, —(O)alkyl, —(O)alkenyl, —(O)alkynyl, —(O)acyl, —O(C1-4 alkyl), —O(C1-4 alkenyl), —O(C1-4 alkynyl), —O—C(O)NH2, —OC(O)N(alkyl), —OC(O)R′R″, —C(O)OH, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-alkenyl, C(O)O-alkynyl, S-alkyl, S-acyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, SCN, OCN, NC, —C(O)—NH2, C(O)NH(alkyl), C(O)N(alkyl)2, C(O)NH(acyl), C(O)N(acyl)2, (S)—NH2, NH-alkyl, N(dialkyl)2, NH-acyl, N-diacyl, or a 3-7 membered heterocycle having O, S, or N taken independently in any combination;
      • each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C26 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, or (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl; and
      • all tautomeric, enantiomeric and stereoisomeric forms thereof;
      • with the caveat that when X is S in Formula (I), then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one.
  • In a second principal embodiment, a compound of the Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00008
    wherein:
      • R, R2, R2′, R3, and R3′ are all as defined above;
      • X* is CY3;
      • Y3 is hydrogen, alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, azido, cyano, alkenyl, alkynyl, —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), CF3, —CONH2, —CONH(alkyl), or —CON(alkyl)2;
      • R1 is H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), or —C(O)N(alkyl)2, wherein an optional substitution on alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may be one or more halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy or alkylthio groups taken in any combination;
      • Base is defined as above for formulae (A)-(G); and
      • A and Z are as defined above,
      • with the caveat that when X is S in Formula (I), then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one; and
      • all tautomeric, enantiomeric and stereoisomeric forms thereof.
  • In preferred embodiments, Bases (A)-(G) have a structure selected from the group consisting of:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00009
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00010
    wherein
      • each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C26 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl, as provided above in the definitions of A and Z for the Base Formulae (A)-(G);
      • each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2;
      • each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl; and
      • each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
  • In its preferred embodiments, the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (I) is selected from the following, in any combination: X is O or S; R is H or phosphate; R1 is H, CH2OH, or CONH2; R2 is OH or F; R3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH2, Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R″ independently is Cl, CN, CONH2 or Me.
  • In its preferred embodiments for Formula (II), the compounds of the present invention comprise nucleosides in which each variable in Formula (II) is selected from the following, in any combination: X* is CH; R is H or phosphate; R1 is H, CH2OH, or CONH2; R2 is OH or F; R3 is alkyl, especially methyl or propynyl, or H at the 3′ position; A is H, CH or N; Z is O, S, or NH; W is NH2, Cl, OMe, OH, NH-cyclopropyl, S-Me; and each R′ and R″ independently is Cl, CN, CONH2 or Me.
  • In all embodiments, optional substituents are selected from the group consisting of one or more halogen, amino, hydroxy, carboxy and alkoxy groups or atoms, among others. It is to be understood that all stereoisomeric and tautomeric forms of the compounds shown are included herein.
  • In one particular embodiment, a compound of the Formula (III), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00011
      • each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
      • X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
      • n is 0-2;
      • each R2′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
      • Base is defined as above for formulae (A)-(G); and preferably is a Base as defined by structures (i)-(xi) above.
  • In one embodiment, the R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, or cyano. In a particular embodiment, R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3. In yet another particular embodiment, R2′ is CH3 or CF3.
  • In one embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate. In anther embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H. In yet another embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
  • In one embodiment, X is O or S. In another embodiment, X is O.
  • In another particular embodiment, a compound of the Formula (IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, is provided:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00012
      • each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
      • X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
      • n is 0-2;
      • each R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
      • Base is defined as above for formulae (A)-(G); and preferably is a Base as defined by structures (i)-(xi) above.
  • In one embodiment, the R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, or cyano. In a particular embodiment, R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3. In yet another particular embodiment, R3′ is CH3 or CF3.
  • In one embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate.
  • In anther embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H. In yet another embodiment, each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
  • In one embodiment, X is O or S. In another embodiment, X is O.
  • The beta-D- and beta-L-nucleosides of this invention belong to a class of anti-pestivirus, anti-flavivirus and anti-HCV agents that inhibit viral polymerase. Triphosphate nucleosides can be screened for their ability to inhibit viral polymerase, whether HCV, flavivirus or pestivirus, in vitro according to screening methods set forth below. Chiron Corporation developed a replicon system for testing potential anti-HCV compounds that utilizes a particular peptide sequence having an HCV protease-recognition site (U.S. Pat. No. 6,436,666; U.S. Pat. No. 6,416,946; U.S. Pat. No. 6,416,944; U.S. Pat. No. 6,379,886; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,326,151, to Chiron Corporation). Other systems for assessing the ability of compounds to inhibit HCV and related viruses include those of Rice (see U.S. Pat. No. 5,874,565) and the polymerase inhibition assay of Dr. Ralf Bartenschlager (see EP 1 043 399 A2).
  • An alternative means of assessing a compound's ability to inhibit HCV, pestivirus and/or flavivirus is through the use of predictive animal model systems. The model of choice for testing HCV is the chimpanzee, which has been used by the applicants. Chimpanzees provide an excellent mammalian system for study of anti-HCV compounds and an insight into the predictability or unpredictability of drug activity based on the closeness of their species relationship to humans.
  • The active compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination, alternation or sequential steps with another anti-HCV agent. In combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially. The dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • In particular, the present invention provides the following:
      • a) a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof;
      • b) a pharmaceutical composition comprising a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • c) a pharmaceutical composition comprising a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent;
      • d) a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment or prophylaxis of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host, especially a host diagnosed as having or being at risk for such infection, comprising a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent;
      • e) a pharmaceutical formulation comprising the beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • f) a method for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host comprising a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • g) a method for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host comprising administering an effective amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • h) a method for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host comprising administering an effective amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • i) a method for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host comprising administering an effective amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • j) a method for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host comprising administering an effective amount of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent;
      • k) use of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV infection in a host;
      • l) use of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus and/or HCV infection in a host;
      • m) use of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus and/or HCV infection in a host;
      • n) use of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, with one or more other effective antiviral agents and optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a pestivirus, flavivirus and/or HCV infection in a host;
      • o) a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, substantially in the absence of enantiomers of the described nucleoside, or substantially isolated from other chemical entities;
      • p) a process for the preparation of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, as provided in more detail below; and
      • q) a process for the preparation of a beta-D- or beta-L-nucleoside compound of Formula (I)-(IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, substantially in the absence of enantiomers of the described nucleoside or substantially isolated from other chemical entities.
  • The active compound can be administered as any salt or prodrug that upon administration to the recipient is capable of providing directly or indirectly the parent compound, or that exhibits activity itself. Non-limiting examples are the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, which are alternatively referred to as “physiologically acceptable salts”, and a compound that has been alkylated or acylated at the 5′-position or on the purine or pyrimidine base, thereby forming a type of “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug”. Further, the modifications can affect the biological activity of the compound, in some cases increasing the activity over the parent compound. This can easily be assessed by preparing the salt or prodrug and testing its antiviral activity according to the methods described herein, or other methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Stereochemistry
  • It is appreciated that nucleosides of the present invention have several chiral centers and may exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds may exhibit polymorphism. It is to be understood that the present invention encompasses any racemic, optically-active, diastereomeric, polymorphic, or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein. It being well known in the art how to prepare optically active forms (for example, by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase).
  • Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials are known in the art, and include at least the following.
      • i) physical separation of crystals—a technique whereby macroscopic crystals of the individual enantiomers are manually separated. This technique can be used if crystals of the separate enantiomers exist, i.e., the material is a conglomerate, and the crystals are visually distinct;
      • ii) simultaneous crystallization—a technique whereby the individual enantiomers are separately crystallized from a solution of the racemate, possible only if the latter is a conglomerate in the solid state;
      • iii) enzymatic resolutions—a technique whereby partial or complete separation of a racemate by virtue of differing rates of reaction for the enantiomers with an enzyme;
      • iv) enzymatic asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby at least one step of the synthesis uses an enzymatic reaction to obtain an enantiomerically pure or enriched synthetic precursor of the desired enantiomer;
      • v) chemical asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is synthesized from an achiral precursor under conditions that produce asymmetry (i.e., chirality) in the product, which may be achieved using chiral catalysts or chiral auxiliaries;
      • vi) diastereomer separations—a technique whereby a racemic compound is reacted with an enantiomerically pure reagent (the chiral auxiliary) that converts the individual enantiomers to diastereomers. The resulting diastereomers are then separated by chromatography or crystallization by virtue of their now more distinct structural differences and the chiral auxiliary later removed to obtain the desired enantiomer;
      • vii) first- and second-order asymmetric transformations—a technique whereby diastereomers from the racemate equilibrate to yield a preponderance in solution of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer or where preferential crystallization of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer perturbs the equilibrium such that eventually in principle all the material is converted to the crystalline diastereomer from the desired enantiomer. The desired enantiomer is then released from the diastereomer;
      • viii) kinetic resolutions—this technique refers to the achievement of partial or complete resolution of a racemate (or of a further resolution of a partially resolved compound) by virtue of unequal reaction rates of the enantiomers with a chiral, non-racemic reagent or catalyst under kinetic conditions;
      • ix) enantiospecific synthesis from non-racernic precursors—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is obtained from non-chiral starting materials and where the stereochemical integrity is not or is only minimally compromised over the course of the synthesis;
      • x) chiral liquid chromatography—a technique whereby the enantiomers of a racemate are separated in a liquid mobile phase by virtue of their differing interactions with a stationary phase. The stationary phase can be made of chiral material or the mobile phase can contain an additional chiral material to provoke the differing interactions;
      • xi) chiral gas chromatography—a technique whereby the racemate is volatilized and enantiomers are separated by virtue of their differing interactions in the gaseous mobile phase with a column containing a fixed non-racemic chiral adsorbent phase;
      • xii) extraction with chiral solvents—a technique whereby the enantiomers are separated by virtue of preferential dissolution of one enantiomer into a particular chiral solvent;
      • xiii) transport across chiral membranes—a technique whereby a racemate is placed in contact with a thin membrane barrier. The barrier typically separates two miscible fluids, one containing the racemate, and a driving force such as concentration or pressure differential causes preferential transport across the membrane barrier. Separation occurs as a result of the non-racemic chiral nature of the membrane which allows only one enantiomer of the racemate to pass through.
        Definitions
  • The term “alkyl” as used herein, unless otherwise specified, refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon of typically C1 to C10, and specifically includes methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethybutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups. Moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, including Cl, F, Br and I so as to form, for eg., CF3, 2-Br-ethyl, CH2F, CH2Cl, CH2CF3, or CF2CF3; hydroxyl, for eg. CH2OH; amino, for eg., CH2NH2, CH2NHCH3, or CH2N(CH3)2; carboxylate; carboxamido; alkylamino; arylamino; alkoxy; aryloxy; nitro; azido, for eg., CH2N3; cyano, for eg., CH2CN; thio; sulfonic acid; sulfate; phosphonic acid; phosphate; and phosphonate, either unprotected or protected as necessary, known to those skilled in the art, for eg., as taught in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition (1991), incorporated herein by reference.
  • The term “lower alkyl” as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to a C1 to C6 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, cyclic as in cyclopropyl, for eg., alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted forms. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • The terms “alkylamino” and “arylamino” refer to an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively.
  • The term “protected” as used herein and, unless otherwise defined, refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes. Numerous oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • The term “aryl” as used herein and, unless otherwise specified, refers to phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl, and preferably phenyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties. The aryl group can be substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, thio, alkylthio, carboxamido, carboxylate, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for eg., as taught in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition (1991), incorporated herein by reference.
  • The terms “alkaryl” and “akylaryl” refer to an alkyl group with an aryl sustituent.
  • The terms “aralkyl” and “arylalkyl” refer to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • The term “halo” as used herein includes bromo, chloro, iodo and fluoro.
  • The term purine base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, 2-azapurine bases that are optionally substituted imidazo-triazines, imidazo-pyridazines, pyrrolo-pyridazines, pyrrolo-triazines, triazolo-triazines including triazolo[4,5-d]triazines, pyrazolo-triazines including pyrazolo[4,5-d]triazines, N6-alkylpurines, N6-acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N6-benzylpurine, N6-halopurine, N6-vinylpurine, N6-acetylenic purine, N6-acyl purine, N6-hydroxyalkyl purine, N6-thioalkyl purine, N2-alkylpurines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, C5-hydroxyalkyl purine, N2-alkylpurines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, triazolopyridinyl, imidazolopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrimidinyl, and pyrazolopyrimidinyl.
  • The Base maybe selected from the group consisting of:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00013
  • The term “acyl” refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl; alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl; aralkyl including benzyl; aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl; aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or C1-C6 alkoxy; sulfonate esters such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl; the mono-, di- or triphosphate ester; trityl or monomethoxytrityl; substituted benzyl; trialkylsilyl as, for eg., dimethyl-t-butylsilyl or diphenylmethylsilyl. Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group. The term “lower acyl” refers to an acyl group in which the non-carbonyl moiety is lower alkyl.
  • As used herein, the terms “substantially free of” and “substantially in the absence of” refer to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85-90% by weight, preferably 95%-98% by weight, and even more preferably 99%-100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside. In a preferred embodiment, the compounds listed in the methods and compounds of this invention are substantially free of enantiomers other than for the one designated.
  • Similarly, the term “isolated” refers to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85%-90% by weight, preferably 95%-98% by weight, and even more preferably 99%-100% by weight, of the nucleoside, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
  • The term “independently” is used herein to indicate that a variable is applied in any one instance without regard to the presence or absence of a variable having that same or a different definition within the same compound. Thus, in a compound in which R″ appears twice and is defined as “independently carbon or nitrogen”, both R″s can be carbon, both R″s can be nitrogen, or one R″ can be carbon and the other nitrogen.
  • The term “host”, as used herein, refers to a unicellular or multicellular organism in which the virus can replicate, including cell lines and animals, and preferably a human. Alternatively, the host can be carrying a part of the flavivirus or pestivirus genome, whose replication or function can be altered by the compounds of the present invention. The term host specifically refers to infected cells, cells transfected with all or part of the flavivirus or pestivirus genome and animals, in particular, primates (including chimpanzees) and humans. In most animal applications of the present invention, the host is a human patient. Veterinary applications, in certain indications, however, are clearly anticipated by the present invention such as in chimpanzees.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug” is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a nucleoside compound, which, upon administration to a patient, provides the nucleoside compound. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art. Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example, hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention. Typical examples of prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on a functional moiety of the active compound. Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, dephosphorylated to produce the active compound. The compounds of this invention possess antiviral activity against flavivirus, pestivirus or HCV, or are metabolized to a compound that exhibits such activity.
  • Nucleoside Prodrug Formulations
  • Any of the nucleosides described herein can be administered as a nucleotide prodrug to increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleoside. A number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known. In general, alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the mono-, di- or triphosphate of the nucleoside reduces polarity and allows passage into cells. Examples of substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the phosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol, alcohols, acyl (including lower acyl); alkyl (including lower alkyl); sulfonate ester including alkyl or arylalkyl sulfonyl including methanesulfonyl and benzyl, wherein the phenyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents as provided in the definition of an aryl given herein; optionally substituted arylsulfonyl; a lipid, including a phospholipid; an amino acid residue or derivative; a carbohydrate; a peptide; cholesterol; or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group which, when administered in vivo, provides a compound wherein R1 is independently H or phosphate. Many more are described in R. Jones and N. Bischoferger, Antiviral Research, 1995, 27:1-17. Any of these can be used in combination with the disclosed nucleosides to achieve a desired effect.
  • In cases where compounds are sufficiently basic or acidic to form stable nontoxic acid or base salts, administration of the compound as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be appropriate. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are organic acid addition salts formed with acids, which form a physiological acceptable anion, for example, tosylate, methanesulfonate, acetate, citrate, malonate, tartarate, succinate, benzoate, ascorbate, α-ketoglutarate, and α-glycerophosphate. Suitable inorganic salts may also be formed, including, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate, and carbonate salts.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion. Alkali metal (for example, sodium, potassium or lithium) or alkaline earth metal (for example calcium) salts of carboxylic acids can also be made.
  • The active nucleoside can also be provided as a 5′-phosphoether lipid or a 5′-ether lipid, as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference herein: Kucera, L. S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raen, Modest E. K., D. L. W., and C. Piantadosi. 1990. “Novel membrane-interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation.” AIDS Res. Hum. Retro Viruses. 6:491-501; Piantadosi, C., J. Marasco C. J., S. L. Morris-Natschke, K. L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J. R. Surles, K. S. Ishaq, L. S. Kucera, N. Iyer, C. A. Wallen, S. Piantadosi, and E. J. Modest. 1991.
  • Nonlimiting examples of U.S. patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at the 5′-OH position of the nucleoside or lipophilic preparations, include U.S. Pat. No. 5,149,794 (Sep. 22, 1992, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,654 (Mar. 16, 1993, Hostetler et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,263 (Jun. 29, 1993, Hostetler et al.); all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Foreign patent applications that disclose lipophilic substituents that can be attached to the nucleosides of the present invention, or lipophilic preparations, include WO 89/02733, WO 90/00555, WO 91/16920, WO 91/18914, WO 93/00910, WO 94/26273, WO 96/15132, EP 0 350 287, EP 93917054.4, and WO 91/19721.
  • Combination and Alternation Therapy
  • It has been recognized that drug-resistant variants of HCV can emerge after prolonged treatment with an antiviral agent. Drug resistance most typically occurs by mutation of a gene that encodes for an enzyme used in viral replication. The efficacy of a drug against HCV infection can be prolonged, augmented, or restored by administering the compound in combination or alternation with a second, and perhaps third, antiviral compound that induces a different mutation from that caused by the principle drug. Alternatively, the pharmacokinetics, biodistriution or other parameter of the drug can be altered by such combination or alternation therapy. In general, combination therapy is typically preferred over alternation therapy because it induces multiple simultaneous stresses on the virus.
  • Any of the HCV treatments described in the Background of the Invention can be used in combination or alternation with the compounds described in this specification. Nonlimiting examples include:
  • (1) Interferon
  • Interferons (IFNs) are compounds that have been commercially available for the treatment of chronic hepatitis for nearly a decade. IFNs are glycoproteins produced by immune cells in response to viral infection. IFNs inhibit viral replication of many viruses, including HCV, and when used as the sole treatment for hepatitis C infection, IFN suppresses serum HCV-RNA to undetectable levels. Additionally, IFN normalizes serum amino transferase levels. Unfortunately, the effects of IFN are temporary and a sustained response occurs in only 8%-9% of patients chronically infected with HCV (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000).
  • A number of patents disclose HCV treatments using interferon-based therapies. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,980,884 to Blatt et al. discloses methods for re-treatment of patients afflicted with HCV using consensus interferon. U.S. Pat. No. 5,942,223 to Bazer et al. discloses an anti-HCV therapy using ovine or bovine interferon-tau. U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,636 to Alber et al. discloses the combination therapy of interleukin-12 and interferon alpha for the treatment of infectious diseases including HCV. U.S. Pat. No. 5,908,621 to Glue et al. discloses the use of polyethylene glycol modified interferon for the treatment of HCV. U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,696 to Chretien et al. discloses the use of thymosins, alone or in combination with interferon, for treating HCV. U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,455 to Valtuena et al. discloses a combination HCV therapy employing interferon and a free radical scavenger. U.S. Pat. No. 5,738,845 to Imakawa discloses the use of human interferon tau proteins for treating HCV. Other interferon-based treatments for HCV are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,676,942 to Testa et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,372,808 to Blatt et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,696.
  • (2) Ribavirin (Battaglia, A. M. et al., Ann. Pharmacother, 2000, 34, 487-494); Berenguer, M. et al. Antivir. Ther., 1998, 3 (Suppl. 3), 125-136).
  • Ribavirin (1-β-D-ribofuranosyl-1-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxamide) is a synthetic, non-interferon-inducing, broad spectrum antiviral nucleoside analog. It is sold under the trade names Virazole™ (The Merck Index, 11th edition, Editor: Budavari, S., Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J., p1304, 1989); Rebetol (Schering Plough) and Co-Pegasus (Roche). U.S. Pat. No. 3,798,209 and RE29,835 (ICN Pharmaceuticals) disclose and claim ribavirin. Ribavirin is structurally similar to guanosine, and has in vitro activity against several DNA and RNA viruses including Flaviviridae (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000). U.S. Pat. No. 4,211,771 (to ICN Pharmaceuticals) discloses the use of ribavirin as an antiviral agent. Ribavirin reduces serum amino transferase levels to normal in 40% of patients, but it does not lower serum levels of HCV-RNA (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000). Thus, ribavirin alone is not effective in reducing viral RNA levels. Additionally, ribavirin has significant toxicity and is known to induce anemia.
  • Combination of Interferon and Ribavirin
  • Schering-Plough sells ribavirin as Rebetol® capsules (200 mg) for administration to patients with HCV. The U.S. FDA has approved Rebetol capsules to treat chronic HCV infection in combination with Schering's alpha interferon-2b products Intron® A and PEG-Intron™. Rebetol capsules are not approved for monotherapy (i.e., administration independent of Intron®A or PEG-Intron), although Intron A and PEG-Intron are approved for monotherapy (i.e., administration without ribavirin). Hoffman La Roche is selling ribavirin under the name Co-Pegasus in Europe and the United States, also for use in combination with interferon for the treatment of HCV. Other alpha interferon products include Roferon-A (Hoffmann-La Roche), Infergen® (Intermune, formerly Amgen's product), and Weliferon® (Wellcome Foundation) are currently FDA-approved for HCV monotherapy. Interferon products currently in development for HCV include: Roferon-A (interferon alfa-2a) by Roche, PEGASYS (pegylated interferon alfa-2a) by Roche, INFERGEN (interferon alfacon-1) by InterMune, OMNIFERON (natural interferon) by Viragen, ALBUFERON by Human Genome Sciences, REBIF (interferon beta-1a) by Ares-Serono, Omega Interferon by BioMedicine, Oral Interferon Alpha by Amarillo Biosciences, and Interferon gamma-1b by InterMune.
  • The combination of IFN and ribavirin for the treatment of HCV infection has been reported to be effective in the treatment of IFN naïve patients (for example, Battaglia, A. M. et al., Ann. Pharmacother. 34:487-494, 2000). Combination treatment is effective both before hepatitis develops and when histological disease is present (for example, Berenguer, M. et al. Antivir. Ther. 3(Suppl. 3):125-136, 1998). Currently, the most effective therapy for HCV is combination therapy of pegylated interferon with ribavirin (2002 NIH Consensus Development Conference on the Management of Hepatitis C). However, the side effects of combination therapy can be significant and include hemolysis, flu-like symptoms, anemia, and fatigue (Gary L. Davis. Gastroenterology 118:S104-S114, 2000).
  • (3) Protease inhibitors have been developed for the treatment of Flaviviridae infections. Examples, include, but are not limited to the following
  • Substrate-based NS3 protease inhibitors (see, for example, Attwood et al., Antiviral peptide derivatives, PCT WO 98/22496, 1998; Attwood et al., Antiviral Chemistry and Chemotherapy 1999, 10, 259-273; Attwood et al., Preparation and use of amino acid derivatives as anti-viral agents, German Patent Pub. DE 19914474; Tung et al. Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hepatitis C virus NS3 protease, PCT WO 98/17679), including alphaketoamides and hydrazinoureas, and inhibitors that terminate in an electrophile such as a boronic acid or phosphonate (see, for example, Llinas-Brunet et al, Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogues, PCT WO 99/07734);
  • Non-substrate-based inhibitors such as 2,4,6-trihydroxy-3-nitro-benzamide derivatives (see, for example, Sudo K. et al., Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications, 1997, 238, 643-647; Sudo K. et al. Antiviral Chemistry and Chemotherapy, 1998, 9, 186), including RD3-4082 and RD3-4078, the former substituted on the amide with a 14 carbon chain and the latter processing a para-phenoxyphenyl group;
  • Phenanthrenequinones possessing activity against protease, for example in a SDS-PAGE and/or autoradiography assay, such as, for example, Sch 68631, isolated from the fermentation culture broth of Streptomyces sp., (see, for example, Chu M. et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 1996, 37, 7229-7232), and Sch 351633, isolated from the fungus Penicillium griseofulvum, which demonstrates activity in a scintillation proximity assay (see, for example, Chu M. et al., Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters 9, 1949-1952); and
  • Selective NS3 inhibitors, for example, based on the macromolecule elgin c, isolated from leech (see, for example, Qasim M. A. et al., Biochemistry, 1997, 36, 1598-1607). Nanomolar potency against the HCV NS3 protease enzyme has been achieved by the design of selective inhibitors based on the macromolecule eglin c. Eglin c, isolated from leech, is a potent inhibitor of several serine proteases such as S. griseus proteases A and B, α-chymotrypsin, chymase and subtilisin.
  • Several U.S. patents disclose protease inhibitors for the treatment of HCV. Non-limiting examples include, but are not limited to the following. U.S. Pat. No. 6,004,933 to Spruce et al. discloses a class of cysteine protease inhibitors for inhibiting HCV endopeptidase. U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,276 to Zhang et al. discloses synthetic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus NS3 protease. The inhibitor is a subsequence of a substrate of the NS3 protease or a substrate of the NS4A cofactor. The use of restriction enzymes to treat HCV is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,865 to Reyes et al. Peptides as NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/008251 to Corvas International, Inc, and WO 02/08187 and WO 02/008256 to Schering Corporation. HCV inhibitor tripeptides are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,534,523, 6,410,531, and 6,420,380 to Boehringer Ingelheim and WO 02/060926 to Bristol Myers Squibb. Diaryl peptides as NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/48172 to Schering Corporation. Iridazoleidinones as NS3 serine protease inhibitors of HCV are disclosed in WO 02/08198 to Schering Corporation and WO 02/48157 to Bristol Myers Squibb. WO 98/17679 to Vertex Pharmaceuticals and WO 02/48116 to Bristol Myers Squibb also disclose HCV protease inhibitors.
  • (4) Thiazolidine derivatives, for example, that show relevant inhibition in a reverse-phase HPLC assay with an NS3/4A fusion protein and NS5A/5B substrate (see, for example, Sudo K. et al., Antiviral Research, 1996, 32, 9-18), especially compound RD-1-6250, possessing a fused cinnamoyl moiety substituted with a long alkyl chain, RD4 6205 and RD4 6193;
  • (5) Thiazolidines and benzanilides, for example, as identified in Kakiuchi N. et al. J. EBS Letters 421, 217-220; Takeshita N. et al. Analytical Biochemistry, 1997, 247, 242-246;
  • (6) Helicase inhibitors (see, for example, Diana G. D. et al., Compounds, compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C, U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,358; Diana G. D. et al., Piperidine derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions thereof and their use in the treatment of hepatitis C, PCT WO 97/36554);
  • (7) Polymerase inhibitors such as
      • i) nucleotide analogues, such as gliotoxin (see, for example, Ferrari R. et al. Journal of Virology, 1999, 73, 1649-1654);
      • ii) the natural product cerulenin (see, for example, Lohmann V. et al., Virology, 1998, 249, 108-118); and
      • iii) non-nucleoside polymerase inhibitors, including, for example, compound R803 (see, for example, WO 04/018463 A2 and WO 03/040112 A1, both to Rigel Pharmaceuticals, Inc.); substituted diamine pyrimidines (see, for example, WO 03/063794 A2 to Rigel Pharmaceuticals, Inc.); benzimidazole derivatives (see, for example, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2004, 14:119-124 and Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2004, 14:967-971, both to Boehringer Ingelheim Corporation); N,N-disubstituted phenylalanines (see, for example, J. Biol. Chem., 2003, 278:9495-98 and J. Med. Chem., 2003, 13:1283-85, both to Shire Biochem, Inc.); substituted thiophene-2-carboxylic acids (see, for example, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2004, 14:793-796 and Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2004, 14:797-800, both to Shire Biochem, Inc.); α,γ-diketoacids (see, for example, J. Med. 5 Chem., 2004, 14-17 and WO 00/006529 A1, both to Merck & Co., Inc.); and meconic acid derivatives (see, for example, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2004, 3257-3261, WO 02/006246 A1 and WO03/062211 A1, all to IRBM Merck & Co., Inc.);
  • (8) Antisense phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides (S—ODN) complementary, for example, to sequence stretches in the 5′ non-coding region (NCR) of the virus (see, for example, Alt M. et al., Hepatology, 1995, 22, 707-717), or to nucleotides 326-348 comprising the 3′ end of the NCR and nucleotides 371-388 located in the core coding region of the HCV RNA (see, for example, Alt M. et al., Archives of Virology, 1997, 142, 589-599; Galderisi U. et al., Journal of Cellular Physiology, 1999, 181, 251-257).
  • (9) Inhibitors of IRES-dependent translation (see, for example, Ikeda N et al., Agent for the prevention and treatment of hepatitis C, Japanese Patent Pub. JP-08268890; Kai Y. et al. Prevention and treatment of viral diseases, Japanese Patent Pub. JP-10101591).
  • (10) Nuclease-resistant ribozymes (see, for example, Maccjak, D. J. et al., Hepatology 1999, 30, abstract 995; U.S. Pat. No. 6,043,077 to Barber et al., and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,869,253 and 5,610,054 to Draper et al.).
  • (11) Nucleoside analogs have also been developed for the treatment of Flaviviridae infections.
  • Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. discloses branched nucleosides, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0050229 A1, 2004/0097461 A1, 2004/0101535 A1, 2003/0060400 A1, 2004/0102414 A1, 2004/0097462 A1, and 2004/0063622 A1 which correspond to International Publication Nos. WO 01/90121 and WO 01/92282. A method for the treatment of hepatitis C infection (and flaviviruses and pestiviruses) in humans and other host animals is disclosed in the Idenix publications that includes administering an effective amount of a biologically active 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, administered either alone or in combination, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. See also U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2004/0006002 and 2004/0006007 as well as WO 03/026589 and WO 03/026675. Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in U.S. patent Publication No. 2004/0077587 pharmaceutically acceptable branched nucleoside prodrugs, and their use in the treatment of HCV and flaviviruses and pestiviruses in prodrugs. See also PCT Publication Nos. WO 04/002422, WO 04/002999, and WO 04/003000. Further, Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Ltd. also discloses in WO 04/046331 Flaviviridae mutations caused by biologically active 2′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Biota Inc. discloses various phosphate derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 3′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection in International Patent Publication WO 03/072757.
  • Emory University and the University of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. (UGARF) discloses the use of 2′-fluoronucleosides for the treatment of HCV in U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,587. See also U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0198171 and International Patent Publication WO 99/43691.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) discloses the use of various 1,3-dioxolane nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. Pat. No. 6,566,365. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,340,690 and 6,605,614; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2002/0099072 and 2003/0225037, as well as International Publication No. WO 01/32153 and WO 00/50424.
  • BioChem Pharma Inc. (now Shire Biochem, Inc.) also discloses various other 2′-halo, 2′-hydroxy and 2′-alkoxy nucleosides for the treatment of a Flaviviridae infection in U.S. patent Publication No. 2002/0019363 as well as International Publication No. WO 01/60315 (PCT/CA01/00197; filed Feb. 19, 2001).
  • ICN Pharmaceuticals, Inc. discloses various nucleoside analogs that are useful in modulating immune response in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,495,677 and 6,573,248. See also WO 98/16184, WO 01/68663, and WO 02/03997.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 6,660,721; U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/083307 A1, 2003/008841 A1, and 2004/0110718; as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/18404; WO 02/100415, WO 02/094289, and WO 04/043159; filed by F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG, discloses various nucleoside analogs for the treatment of HCV RNA replication.
  • Pharmasset Limited discloses various nucleosides and antimetabolites for the treatment of a variety of viruses, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV, in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2003/0087873, 2004/0067877, 2004/0082574, 2004/0067877, 2004/002479, 2003/0225029, and 2002/00555483, as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/32920, WO 01/79246, WO 02/48165, WO 03/068162, WO 03/068164 and WO 2004/013298.
  • Merck & Co., Inc. and Isis Pharmaceuticals disclose in U.S. patent Publication Nos. 2002/0147160, 2004/0072788, 2004/0067901, and 2004/0110717; as well as the corresponding International Patent Publication Nos. WO 02/057425 (PCT/US02/01531; filed Jan. 18, 2002) and WO 02/057287 (PCT/US02/03086; filed Jan. 18, 2002) various nucleosides, and in particular several pyrrolopyrimidine nucleosides, for the treatment of viruses whose replication is dependent upon RNA-dependent RNA polymerase, including Flaviviridae, and in particular HCV. See also WO 2004/000858, WO 2004/003138, WO 2004/007512, and WO 2004/009020.
  • U.S. patent Publication No. 2003/028013 A1 as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 03/051899, WO 03/061576, WO 03/062255 WO 03/062256, WO 03/062257, and WO 03/061385, filed by Ribapharm, also are directed to the use of certain nucleoside analogs to treat hepatitis C virus.
  • Genelabs Technologies disclose in U.S. patent Publication No. 2004/0063658 as well as International Patent Publication Nos. WO 03/093290 and WO 04/028481 various base modified derivatives of nucleosides, including 1′, 2′, 35′ or 4′-branched β-D or β-L nucleosides, for the treatment of hepatitis C infection.
  • Eldrup et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p. A75) described the structure activity relationship of 2′-modified nucleosides for inhibition of HCV.
  • Bhat et al (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.); p A75) describe the synthesis and pharmacokinetic properties of nucleoside analogues as possible inhibitors of HCV RNA replication. The authors report that 2′-modified nucleosides demonstrate potent inhibitory activity in cell-based replicon assays.
  • Olsen et al. (Oral Session V, Hepatitis C Virus, Flaviviridae; 16th International Conference on Antiviral Research (Apr. 27, 2003, Savannah, Ga.) p A76) also described the effects of the 2′-modified nucleosides on HCV RNA replication.
  • (12) Other miscellaneous compounds including 1-amino-alkylcyclohexanes (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,034,134 to Gold et al.), alkyl lipids (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,757 to Chojkier et al.), vitamin E and other antioxidants (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,757 to Chojkier et al.), squalene, amantadine, bile acids (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,964 to Ozeki et al.), N-(phosphonoacetyl)-L-aspartic acid (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,905 to Diana et al.), benzenedicarboxamides (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,388 to Diana et al.), polyadenylic acid derivatives (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,496,546 to Wang et al.), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,026,687 to Yarchoan et al.), benzimidazoles (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,891,874 to Colacino et al.), plant extracts (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,837,257 to Tsai et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,859 to Omer et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 6,056,961), and piperidenes (for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,905 to Diana et al.).
  • (13) Other compounds currently in clinical development for treatment of hepatitis C virus include, for example: Interleukin-10 by Schering-Plough, IP-501 by Interneuron, Merimebodib VX-497 by Vertex, AMANTADINE® (Symmetrel) by Endo Labs Solvay, HEPTAZYME® by RPI, IDN-6556 by Idun Pharma., XTL-002 by XTL., HCV/MF59 by Chiron, CIVACIR® (Hepatitis C Immune Globulin) by NABI, LEVOVIRIN® by ICN/Ribapharm, VIRAMIDINE® by ICN/Ribapharm, ZADAXIN® (thymosin alfa-1) by Sci Clone, thymosin plus pegylated interferon by Sci Clone, CEPLENE®) (histamine dihydrochloride) by Maxim, VX 950/LY 570310 by Vertex/Eli Lilly, ISIS 14803 by Isis Pharmaceutical/Elan, IDN-6556 by Idun Pharmaceuticals, Inc., JTK 003 by AKROS Pharma, BILN-2061 by Boehringer Ingelheim, CellCept (mycophenolate mofetil) by Roche, T67, a β-tubulin inhibitor, by Tularik, a therapeutic vaccine directed to E2 by Innogenetics, FK788 by Fujisawa Healthcare, Inc., IdB 1016 (Siliphos, oral silybin-phosphatdylcholine phytosome), RNA replication inhibitors (VP50406) by ViroPharma/Wyeth, therapeutic vaccine by Intercell, therapeutic vaccine by Epimmune/Genencor, IRES inhibitor by Anadys, ANA 245 and ANA 246 by Anadys, immunotherapy (Therapore) by Avant, protease inhibitor by Corvas/SChering, helicase inhibitor by Vertex, fusion inhibitor by Trimeris, T cell therapy by CellExSys, polymerase inhibitor by Biocryst, targeted RNA chemistry by PTC Therapeutics, Dication by Immtech, Int., protease inhibitor by Agouron, protease inhibitor by Chiron/Medivir, antisense therapy by AVI BioPharma, antisense therapy by Hybridon, hemopurifier by Aethlon Medical, therapeutic vaccine by Merix, protease inhibitor by Bristol-Myers Squibb/Axys, Chron-VacC, a therapeutic vaccine, by Tripep, UT 231B by United Therapeutics, protease, helicase and polymerase inhibitors by Genelabs Technologies, IRES inhibitors by Immusol, R803 by Rigel Pharmaceuticals, INFERGEN® (interferon alphacon-1) by InterMune, OMNIEFERON® (natural interferon) by Viragen, ALBUFERON® by Human Genome Sciences, REBIF® (interferon beta-1a) by Ares-Serono, Omega Interferon by BioMedicine, Oral Interferon Alpha by Amarillo Biosciences, interferon gamma, interferon tau, and Interferon gamma-1b by InterMune.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • Hosts, including humans, infected with pestivirus, flavivirus, HCV or another organism replicating through a RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase, can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. The active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
  • A preferred dose of the compound for pestivirus, flavivirus or HCV will be in the range from about 1 to 50 mg/kg, preferably 1 to 20 mg/kg, of body weight per day, more generally 0.1 to about 100 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day. The effective dosage range of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs can be calculated based on the weight of the parent nucleoside to e delivered. If the salt or prodrug exhibits activity in itself, the effective dosage can be estimated as above using the weight of the salt or prodrug, or by other means known to those skilled in the art.
  • The compound is conveniently administered in unit any suitable dosage form, including but not limited to one containing 7 to 3000 mg, or 70 to 1400 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form. An oral dosage in one embodiment is 50-1000 mg. In another embodiment, the dosage form contains 0.5-500 mg; or 0.5-100 mg; or 0.5-50 mg; or 0.5-25 mg; or 1.0-10 mg.
  • Ideally the active ingredient should be administered to achieve peak plasma concentrations of the active compound of from about 0.2 to 70 μM, preferably about 1.0 to 10 μM. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of a 0.1 to 5% solution of the active ingredient, optionally in saline, or administered as a bolus of the active ingredient.
  • The concentration of active compound in the drug composition will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition. The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at varying intervals of time.
  • A preferred mode of administration of the active compound is oral. Oral compositions will generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They may be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can e included as part of the composition.
  • The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unit forms can contain various other materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar, shellac, or other enteric agents.
  • The compound can be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, chewing gum or the like. A syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
  • The compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salts thereof can also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antibiotics, antifungals, anti-inflammatories, or other antivirals, including other nucleoside compounds. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, sucutaneous, or topical application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The parental preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • If administered intravenously, preferred carriers are physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • In a preferred embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation.
  • Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) are also preferred as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811 (which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). For example, liposome formulations may be prepared by dissolving appropriate lipid(s) (such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol) in an inorganic solvent that is then evaporated, leaving behind a thin film of dried lipid on the surface of the container. An aqueous solution of the active compound or its monophosphate, diphosphate, and/or triphosphate derivatives is then introduced into the container. The container is then swirled by hand to free lipid material from the sides of the container and to disperse lipid aggregates, thereby forming the liposomal suspension.
  • Processes for the Preparation of Active Compounds
  • The nucleosides of the present invention can be synthesized by any means known in the art. In particular, the synthesis of the present nucleosides can be achieved by either alkylating the appropriately modified sugar, followed by glycosylation or glycosylation followed by alkylation of the nucleoside, though preferably alkylating the appropriately modified sugar, followed by glycosylation. The following non-limiting embodiments illustrate some general methodology to obtain the nucleosides of the present invention.
  • A. General Synthesis of 1′-C-Branched Nucleosides
  • 1′-C branched ribonucleosides of the following structures:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00014
    wherein
      • R is H, phosphate (including mono-, di-, or triphosphate or a stabilized phosphate prodrug) or phosphonate;
      • n is 0-2;
      • when X is CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, CH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl maybe optionally substituted;
      • when X is O, S[O]n, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen,
      • then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), halogenated alkyl, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —C(H)═N—NH2, C(S)NH2, C(S)NH(alkyl), or C(S)N(alkyl)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl maybe optionally substituted;
      • when X* is CY3;
      • then each R1 is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, wherein an optional substitution on alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may be one or more halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy or alkylthio groups taken in any combination; and
      • Y3 is hydrogen, alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, azido, cyano, alkenyl, alkynyl, —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), CF3, —CONH2, —CONH(alkyl), —CON(alkyl)2;
      • each R2 and R3 independently is OH, NH2, SH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl including lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)NH2, NC, C(O)OH, SCN, OCN, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
      • each R2′ and R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH;
      • Base is selected from the group consisting of:
        Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00015
        wherein
      • each A independently is N or C—R5;
      • W is H, OH, —O(acyl), —O(C1-4 alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)R4R4, —OC(O)N R4R4, SH, —S(acyl), —S(C1-4 alkyl), NH2, NH(acyl), N(acyl)2, NH(C1-4 alkyl), N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —N(cycloalkyl) C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, N3, NO2, NH═NH2, N3, NHOH, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(acyl), —C(O)N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH(C1-4 alkyl), —C(O)N(C1-4 alkyl)2, —C(O)N(alkyl)(acyl), or halogenated alkyl;
      • Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
      • each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
      • each R5 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, I, CN, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, carboxy, C(═NH)NH2, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 alkyloxycarbonyl, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NO2, N3, halogenated alkyl especially CF3, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C3-6 cycloalkylamino, C1-6 alkoxy, SH, —S(C1-4 alkyl), —S(C1-4 alkenyl), —S(C1-4 alkynyl), C1-6 alkylthio, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl, C3-6 cycloalkylamino -alkenyl, -alkynyl, —(O)alkyl, —(O)alkenyl, —(O)alkynyl, —(O)acyl, —O(C1-4 alkyl), —O(C1-4 alkenyl), —O(Cl4 alkynyl), —O—C(O)NH2, —OC(O)N(alkyl), —OC(O)R′R″, —C(O)OH, C(O)O-alkyl, C(O)O-alkenyl, C(O)O-alkynyl, S-alkyl, S-acyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, SCN, OCN, NC, —C(O)—NH2, C(O)NH(alkyl), C(O)N(alkyl)2, C(O)NH(acyl), C(O)N(acyl)2, (S)—NH2, NH-alkyl, N(dialkyl)2, NH-acyl, N-diacyl, or a 3-7 membered heterocycle having O, S, or N taken independently in any combination;
      • each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, or (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl; and all tautomeric, enantiomeric and stereoisomeric forms thereof;
      • with the caveat that when X is S in Formula (I), then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one, can be prepared according to Schemes 1, 2 or 7 below.
        Modification from the Lactone
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted lactone. The lactone may be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution and cyclization techniques. The lactone optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991. The protected lactone can then be coupled with a suitable coupling agent, such as an organometallic carbon nucleophile like a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R6—SiMe3 in TAF with the appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, to give the 1′-alkylated sugar.
  • The optionally activated sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nuceleotides, Plenum Press, 1994. For example, an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in the appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 1′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired. The synthesis of a ribonucleoside is shown in Scheme 1. Alternatively, deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside an optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction as, for example, via the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00016
    Alternative Method for the Preparation of 1′-C-Branched Nucleosides
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted hexose. The hexose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization (as, for example, via alkaline treatment), substitution and coupling techniques. The hexose can be protected selectively to give the appropriate hexa-furanose, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • The 1′-OH optionally can be activated to a suitable leaving group such as an acyl group or a halogen via acylation or halogenation, respectively. The optionally activated sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994. For example, an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature. Alternatively, a halo-sugar can be coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • The 1′-CH2—OH, if protected, selectively can be deprotected by methods well known in the art. The resultant primary hydroxyl can be reduced to give the methyl, using a suitable reducing agent. Alternatively, the hydroxyl can be activated prior to reduction to facilitate the reaction, i.e., via the Barton reduction. In an alternate embodiment, the primary hydroxyl can be oxidized to the aldehyde, then coupled with a carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R6—SiMe3 in TAF with an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 1′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired. The synthesis of a ribonucleoside is shown in Scheme 2. Alternatively, deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside optionally can be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction as, for example, via the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00017
  • In addition, the L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention can be prepared following the same general methods (1 or 2), beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • General Synthesis of 2′-C-Branched Nucleosides
  • 2′-C-branched ribonucleosides of the following structures:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00018
    wherein R, R1, R1′, R2, R2′, R3, R3′, X, X*, and Base are all as described above, can be prepared according to Schemes 3 or 4 below.
    Glycosylation of the Nucleboase with an Appropriately Modified Sugar
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted sugar with a 2′-OH and 2′-H, with an appropriate leaving group (LG), such as an acyl or halogen group, for example. The sugar can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution, oxidation and/or reduction techniques. The substituted sugar can then be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar. Possible oxidizing agents are Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molydate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Then coupling of an organometallic carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R6—SiMe3 in TAF with the ketone and an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, yields the 2′-alkylated sugar. The alkylated sugar optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • The optionally protected sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994. For example, an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature. Alternatively, a halo-sugar can e coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 2′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 3. Alternatively, a deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can e reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00019
    Modification of a Pre-Formed Nucleoside
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted nucleoside with a 2′-OH and 2′-H. The nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard coupling techniques. The nucleoside optionally can be protected with suitable protecting groups, preferably with acyl or silyl groups, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as described in Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • The appropriately protected nucleoside then can be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar. Possible oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molydate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, a 2′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 4. Alternatively, the deoxyribonucleoside may be desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside optionally may be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00020
  • In another embodiment of the invention, the L-enantiomers are desired. These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • C. General Synthesis of 3′-C-Branched Nucleosides
  • 3′-C-branched ribonucleosides of the following structures:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00021
    wherein R, R1, R1′, R2, R2′, R3, R3′ X, X*, and Base are all as described above, can be prepared according to Schemes 5 or 6 below.
    Glycosylation of the Nucleobase with an Appropriately Modified Sugar (Scheme 5)
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted sugar with a 3′-OH and a 3′-H, with an appropriate leaving group (LG) such as, for example, an acyl group or a halogen. The sugar can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution, oxidation and/or reduction techniques. The substituted sugar then can be oxidized by an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 3′-modified sugar.
  • Possible oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molydate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Then coupling of an organometallic carbon nucleophile such as a Grignard reagent, an organolithium, lithium dialkylcopper or R6—SiMe3 in TAF with the ketone and an appropriate non-protic solvent at a suitable temperature, yields the 3′-C-branched sugar. The 3′-C-branched sugar optionally can e protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • The optionally protected sugar can then be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught in Townsend, Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994. For example, an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at a suitable temperature. Alternatively, a halo-sugar can be coupled to a silylated base in the presence of trimethylsilyltriflate.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 3′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 5. Alternatively, a deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00022
    Modification of a Preformed Nucleoside.
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted nucleoside with a 3′-OH and 3′-H. The nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard coupling techniques. The nucleoside can be optionally protected with suitable protecting groups, preferably with acyl or silyl groups, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • The appropriately protected nucleoside can then be oxidized with the appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-modified sugar. Possible oxidizing agents include Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molydate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 3′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired, the synthesis of which is shown in Scheme 6. Alternatively, a deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00023
  • In another embodiment of the invention, the L-enantiomers are desired. These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • General Synthesis of 4′-C-Branched Nucleosides
  • 4′-C-branched ribonucleosides of the following structures:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00024
    wherein R, R1, R1′, R2, R2′, R3, R3′, X, X*, and Base are all as described above, can be prepared according to the following general methods.
    Modification from the pentodialdo-furanose.
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted pentodialdo-furanose. The pentodialdo-furanose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization, substitution and cyclization techniques.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the pentodialdo-furanose is prepared from the appropriately substituted hexose. The hexose can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard epimerization (for eg., via alkaline treatment), substitution, and coupling techniques. The hexose can be in either the furanose form or cyclized by any means known in the art, such as methodology taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994, preferably by selectively protecting the hexose, to give the appropriate hexafuranose.
  • The 4′-hydroxymethylene of the hexafuranose then can be oxidized with an appropriate oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 4′-aldo-modified sugar. Possible oxidizing agents are Swern reagents, Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molybdate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide, although using H3PO4, DMSO and DCC in a mixture of benzene/pyridine at room temperature is preferred.
  • Then the pentodialdo-furanose optionally can be protected with a suitable protecting group, preferably with an acyl or silyl group, by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991. In the presence of a base, such as sodium hydroxide, the protected pentodialdo-furanose then can be coupled with a suitable electrophilic alkyl, halogeno-alkyl (such as CF3), alkenyl or alkynyl (i.e., allyl), to obtain the 4′-alkylated sugar. Alternatively, the protected pentodialdo-furanose can be coupled with a corresponding carbonyl, such as formaldehyde, in the presence of a base like sodium hydroxide and with an appropriate polar solvent like dioxane, at a suitable temperature, and then reduced with an appropriate reducing agent to provide the 4′-alkylated sugar. In one embodiment, the reduction is carried out using PhOC(S)Cl and DMAP in acetonitrile at room temperature, followed by reflux treatment with ACCN and TMSS in toluene.
  • The optionally activated sugar can be coupled to the base by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994. For example, an acylated sugar can be coupled to a silylated base with a Lewis acid, such as tin tetrachloride, titanium tetrachloride, or trimethylsilyltriflate in an appropriate solvent at room temperature.
  • Subsequently, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • In a particular embodiment, the 4′-C-branched ribonucleoside is desired. Alternatively, a deoxyribonucleoside is desired. To obtain these nucleosides, the formed ribonucleoside can optionally be protected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, and then the 2′-OH can be reduced with a suitable reducing agent. Optionally, the 2′-OH can be activated to facilitate reduction, such as, for example, by the Barton reduction.
  • In another embodiment of the invention, the L-enantiomers are desired. These L-enantiomers corresponding to the compounds of the invention may be prepared following the same general methods given above, but beginning with the corresponding L-sugar or nucleoside L-enantiomer as the starting material.
  • Methods for Ribofuranosyl-2-azapurine Synthesis
    • Preparation of 1′-C-methyl-ribofuranosyl-2-azapurine via 6-amino-9-(1-deoxy-beta-D-psicofuranosyl)purine
  • As an alternative method of preparation, the title compound can be prepared according to the published procedure of Farkas and Sorm (J. Farkas and F. Sorm, “Nucleic acid components and their analogues. XCIV. Synthesis of 6-amino-9-(1-deoxy-beta-D-psicofuranosyl)purine,” Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun., 1967, 32:2663-7; and J. Farkas, Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun., 1966, 31:1535 (Scheme 7).
  • In a similar manner, but using the appropriate sugar and 2-azapurine base corresponding to the desired product compound, a variety of Formula (I) and/or Formula (II) compounds can be prepared.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00025
    Alternative Methods for Ribofuranosyl-Purine Analogue Synthesis
    • Preparation of ribofuranosyl-purine Analogues: 2-aza-3,7-dideazaadenosine Derivative Compounds
  • Preparation of 2-aza-3,7-dideazaadenosine derivative compounds may be prepared according to the published synthesis of L. Towsend et al., Bioorganic & Med. Chem. Letters, 1991, 1(2): 111-114, where the starting material, ethyl-3-cyanopyrrole-2-carboxylate 4 was synthesized by Huisgen & Laschtuvka, according to the procedure provided in Chemische Berichte, 1960, 93:65-81, as shown in Scheme 8:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00026
    • Preparation of ribofuranosyl-purine Analogues: 2-aza-3-deazaadenosine Derivative Compounds
  • Preparation of 2-aza-3-deazaadenosine derivative compounds may be prepared according to the published synthesis of B. Otter et al., J.Heterocyclic Chem., 1984, 481-89 shown in Scheme 9. The commercially available starting material used is the 4,5-dichloro-6-pyridazone 12.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00027
  • An alternative preparation of 2-aza-3-deazaadenosine derivative compounds that utilizes a chlorination step is that according to R. Panzica, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans I, 1989, 1769-1774 and J.Med. Chem., 1993, 4113-4120, shown in Scheme 10:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00028
    • Preparation of Purine Analogues for Nucleosides: Optionally Substituted 2,8-diaza-3,7-dideazaadenine Derivative Compounds
  • Preparation of certain 2,8-diaza-3,7-dideazaadenosine derivative compounds may be prepared according to the published synthesis by Oda et al. in J.Heterocyclic Chem., 1984, 21:1241-55 and Chem. Pharm. Bull., 1984, 32(11):4437-46, as shown in Scheme 11. The starting material is commercially available 4,5-dichloro-6-pyridazone 12.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00029
    • Preparation of Purine Analogues for Nucleosides: 2,8-diaza-3-deazaadenosine Derivative Compounds
  • Preparation of certain 2,8-diaza-3-deazaadenosine derivative compounds may be prepared according to the published synthesis by Panzica et al. in J.Heterocyclic Chem., 1982, 285-88, J. Med. Chem., 1993, 4113-20, and Bioorg. & Med. Chem. Letters., 1996, 4(10):1725-31, as provided in Scheme 12. The key intermediate 27 was prepared via a 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reaction between the 2,3,5-tri-O-benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl azide 26 and methyl-hydroxy-2-butylnoate 25. A ribofuranosyl azide 26 synthesis was described by A. Stimac et al., Carbohydrate Res., 1992, 232(2):359-65, using SnCl4 catalyzed azidolysis of 1-O-Acetyl-2,3,5-tri-O-benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranose with Me3SiN3 in CH2Cl2 at room temperature.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00030
    • Preparation of Purine Analogues for Nucleosides: Alternative Preparation of 2,8-diaza-3-deazaadenine Derivative Compounds
  • 2,8-diaza-3-deazaadenine derivative compounds may be prepared (see Scheme 13) according to the published synthesis by Chen et al. in J.Heterocyclic Chem., 1982, 285-88; however, no condensation of this compound with ribofuranose is found.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00031
    • Preparation of ribofuranosyl-2-azapurines via Use of Protective Groups
  • As an alternative method of preparation, the compounds of the present invention can also be prepared by synthetic methods well known to those skilled in the art of nucleoside and nucleotide chemistry, such as taught by Townsend in Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Plenum Press, 1994.
  • A representative general synthetic method is provided in Scheme 14. The starting material is a 3,5-is-O-protected beta-D-alkyl ribofuranoside, but it will be understood that any 2′, 3′, or 5′-position may carry a protecting group to shield it from reacting. The 2′-C—OH then is oxidized with a suitable oxidizing agent in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to yield the 2′-keto-modified sugar. Possible oxidizing agents are Swern reagents, Jones' reagent (a mixture of chromic and sulfuric acids), Collins' reagent (dipyridine Cr(VI)oxide), Corey's reagent (pyridinium chlorochromate), pyridinium dichromate, acid dichromate, potassium permanganate, MnO2, ruthenium tetroxide, phase transfer catalysts such as chromic acid or permanganate supported on a polymer, Cl2-pyridine, H2O2-ammonium molydate, NarO2—CAN, NaOCl in HOAc, copper chromate, copper oxide, Raney nickel, palladium acetate, Meerwin-Pondorf-Verley reagent (aluminum t-butoxide with another ketone) and N-bromosuccinimide.
  • Next, addition of a Grignard reagent, such as, for example, an alkyl-, alkenyl- or alkynyl-magnesium halide like CH3MgBr, CH3CH2MgBr, vinylMgBr, allylMgBr and ethynylMgBr, or an alkyl-, alkenyl- or alkynyl-lithium, such as CH3Li, in a suitable organic solvent, such as, for example, diethyl ether or THF, across the double bond of the 2′-carbonyl group provides a tertiary alcohol at this position. The addition of a hydrogen halide in a suitable solvent, such as, for example, Hr in HOAc, in the subsequent step provides a leaving group (LG) such as, for example, a chloro, bromo or iodo, at the C-1 anomeric carbon of the sugar ring that later generates a nucleosidic linkage. Other suitable LGs include C-1 sulfonates such as, for example, methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate and/or p-toluenesulfonate.
  • The introduction in the next step of a metal salt (Li, Na or K) of an appropriately substituted 2-azapurine in a suitable organic solvent such as, for example, THF, acetonitrile of DMF, results in the formation of the desired nucleosidic linkage and addition of the desired 2-azapurine base. This displacement reaction may be catalyzed by a phase transfer catalyst like TDA-1 or triethylbenzylammonium chloride. The introduction of a “Z” substituent on any of base formulae (i)-(vi) optionally may be performed subsequent to the initial addition of protecting groups. For example, the introduction of an amino group for “Z” is accomplished by the addition of an appropriate amine in an appropriate solvent to the 2′-C-halo intermediate just prior to the last step of removal of the protecting groups. Appropriate amines include alcoholic or liquid ammonia to generate a primary amine (—NH2), an alkylamine to generate a secondary amine (—NHR), or a dialkylamine to generate a tertiary amine (—NRR′).
  • Finally, the nucleoside can be deprotected by methods well known to those skilled in the art, as by Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991. It is to be noted that this reaction scheme can be used for joining any of the purine nucleoside analogue bases provided for in Schemes 8-13 with a ribofuranosyl moiety.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00032
  • The present invention is described by way of illustration in the following examples. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that these examples are in no way limiting and that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.
    • EXAMPLES
  • The test compounds were dissolved in DMSO at an initial concentration of 200 μM and then were serially diluted in culture medium.
  • Unless otherwise stated, bay hamster kidney (HK-21) (ATCC CCL-10) and bos Taurus (T) (ATCC CRL 1390) cells were grown at 37° C. in a humidified CO2 (5%) atmosphere. HK-21 cells were passaged in Eagle MEM additioned of 2 mM L-glutamine, 10% fetal ovine serum (FS, Gibco) and Earle's SS adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate and 0.1 mM non-essential amino acids. T cells were passaged in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium with 4 mM L-glutamine and 10% horse serum (HS, Gibco), adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate, 4.5 g/L glucose and 1.0 mM sodium pyruvate. The vaccine strain 17D (YFV-17D) (Stamaril®, Pasteur Merieux) and Bovine Viral Diarrhea virus (BVDV) (ATCC VR-534) were used to infect HK and T cells, respectively, in 75 cm2 bottles. After a 3 day incubation period at 37° C., extensive cytopathic effect was observed. Cultures were freeze-thawed three times, cell debris were removed by centrifugation and the supernatant was aliquoted and stored at −70° C. YFV-17D and VDV were titrated in HK-21 and T cells, respectively, that were grown to confluency in 24-well plates.
  • The following examples are derived by selection of an appropriate, optionally substituted sugar or cyclopentane ring coupled with an optionally substituted 2-azapurine base, and prepared according to the following synthetic schemes:
      • Example 1: Synthesis of optionally substituted 1′-C-branched-ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl, -thiophenyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurines;
      • Example 2: Synthesis of optionally substituted 2′-C-branched-ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl, -thiophenyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurines;
      • Example 3: Synthesis of optionally substituted 3′-C-branched-ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl, -thiophenyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurines;
      • Example 4: Synthesis of optionally substituted 4′-C-branched-ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl, -thiophenyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurines;
      • Examples 5-13: Synthesis of specific compounds of the present invention; and
      • Examples 14-18: Biologic test results of representative examples of compounds of the present invention.
    Example 1 1′-C-Branched ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurine, Optionally Substituted
  • The title compound is prepared according to Schemes 1, 2, or 7. In a similar manner but using the appropriate sugar or cyclopentane ring and optionally substituted 2-azapurine base, the following nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00033
    wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • Alternatively, the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base. In this reaction, an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
    • Example 1a 1′-C-hydroxymethyl-2-azaadenosine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00034
  • Step 1: 2-azaadenine, NaH, ACN, rt, 24 hrs; Step 2: MeONa/MeOH
  • The starting material 2-azaadenine may be prepared starting from malonitrile by the synthesis taught by D. W. Wooley, Journal of Biological Chemistry, (1951), 189:401.
    • Example 2 2′-C-Branched ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurine, Optionally Substituted
  • The title compound is prepared according to Schemes 3, 4, or through protection of appropriately selected substituent groups in Schemes 7 or 8. In a similar manner but using the appropriate sugar or cyclopentane ring and optionally substituted 2-azapurine base, the following nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00035
    wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • Alternatively, the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base. In this reaction, an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
    • Example 2a 2′-C-methyl-2-azaadenosine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00036
  • (Synthesis according to the procedure of J. A. Montgomery, Nucleic Acid Chemistry, 1978, Part II, 681-685 starting with 2′-C-methyladenosine.)
  • Step 1: H2O2, AcOH, 80%; Step 2: BnBr, DMAc, Step 3: NaOH, H2O, EtOH, 30%, Step 4: NH3/MeOH, 80° C., 2 days, 60%; Step 5: H2/Pd/C, 3 atm, MeOH, 30% Step 6: .NaNO2, AcOH, H2O, 50%.
  • 4-Amino-7-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine (2′-C-methyl-2-azaadenosine): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.82 (s, 1H, H8), 7.97 (br, 2H, NH2), 6.12 (s, 1H, H1′), 5.22-5.51 (m, 3H, 3OH), 3.70-4.17 (m, 4H, H3′, H4′, 2H5′), 0.80 (s, 3H, CH3).
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 153, 146, 142, 116, 92, 83, 79, 72, 60, 20. m/z (FAB>0) 565 (2M+H)+, 283 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 563 (2M−H)−.
  • Alternatively, 2-azaadenosine shown as the final product in Example 2.a. may be prepared starting with adenosine, according to the procedure of J. A. Montgomery, Nucleic Acid Chemistry, 1978, Part II, 681-685 starting with 2′-C-methyladenosine, or via 2-azainosine in a synthetic procedure taught by R. P. Panzica, Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, 1972, 9:623-628 starting with AICA riboside.
    • Example 2b 2′-C-methyl-pyrrolo-4-amino-1,2,3-triazine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00037
  • Step 1: NCS, DMF; Step 2: mcPBA, AcOH; Step 3: a) BnBr, DMAc; b) NaOH, H2O, EtOH, Step 4: NH3/MeOH, 80° C., Step 5: H2/Pd/C, MeOH; Step 6: NaNO2, AcOH, H2O.
    • Example 3 3′-C-Branched ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurine, Optionally Substituted
  • The title compound is prepared according to Schemes 5, 6, or through protection of appropriately selected sustituent groups in Scheme 8. In a similar manner ut using the appropriate sugar or cyclopentane ring and optionally substituted 2-azapurine base, the following nucleosides of Formulae (I) and (II)may be prepared:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00038
    wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • Alternatively, the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base. In this reaction, an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
    • Example 4 4′-C-Branched ribofuranosyl, -sulfonyl or cyclopentanyl-2-azapurine, Optionally Substituted
  • The title compound is prepared according to modification from the corresponding pentodialdo-furanose. In a similar manner but using the appropriate sugar or cyclopentane ring and optionally substituted 2-azapurine base, the following nucleosides of Formulae (I) or (II) may be prepared:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00039
    wherein: base may be any of the Formulae (A)-(G) as described herein where R in each instance may exist in mono-, di- or triphosphate form.
  • Alternatively, the Dimroth rearrangement may be used for making 2-azapurines from the corresponding purine base. In this reaction, an N-alkylated or N-arylated imino heterocycle undergoes rearrangement to its corresponding alkylamino or arylamino heterocycle.
    • Example 5 Synthesis of 4-amino-1-(□-D-ribofuranosyl)imdazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00040
    • Step A: 1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)-5-benzyloxymethylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • The 5-benzyloxymethylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine (500 mg, 1.95 mmol) [for preparation see Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, 1984, Vol 21, 481] was heated at reflux in hexamethyldisilazane (6 mL) for 1 hour. The mixture was evaporated to dryness to give a slight yellow syrup which was dissolved in dry 1,2-dichloroethane (20 mL). The 1-O-acetyl -2,3,5-tri-O-benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranose (1.04 g, 2.06 mmol) and stannic chloride (0.4 mL, 3.44 mmol) were added at 20° C. and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into an aqueous solution of sodium hydrogenocarbonate, filtrated through a pad of celite and washed by dichloromethane. The organic layer was evaporated to dryness to give a yellow foam. The crude product was purified on silica gel using n-hexane/ethyl acetate (3/2) as eluant to give the title compound (703 mg) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 4.39 (s, 2H, CH2), 4.60 (m, 2H), 4.73 (m, 1H), 5.34 (dd, 2H, CH2), 5.77-5.88 (m, 2H, H2′ and H3′), 6.56 (m, 1H, H1′), 6.98-7.10 (m, 5H), 7.23-7.32 (m, 6H), 7.41-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.68-7.73 (m, 2H), 7.74-7.8 (m, 4H), 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H).
    • Step B: 1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • To a solution containing the compound from Step B (500 mg, 0.7 mmol), in dry dichloromethane (25 mL) was added a pre-cooled (−78° C.) solution of boron trichloride 1M (5 mL) at −78° C. and stirred for 2 hours at −78° C. A mixture of methanol/dichloromethane (1/1) was added to the mixture at −78° C. and then at 20° C. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to give a yellow powder. The crude product was purified on silica gel using n-hexane/ethyl acetate (3/2) as eluant to give the title compound (400 mg) as a yellow powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 4.77-4.98 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 5.95-6.12 (m, 2H, H2′ and H3′), 6.65 (m, 1H, H1′), 7.39-7.76 (m, 9H), 7.84-8.06 (m, 6H), 8.64-5.79 (m, 2H, H3 and H8), 12.84 (br, 1H, NH).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 581 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 579 (M−H)−
    • Step C: 4-chloro-1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • A solution containing the compound from Step B (1.32 g, 2.27 mmol), the N,N-diethylaniline (365 μL), tetrabutylammonium chloride (1.2 g), freshly distilled phosphorus chloride (1.3 μL) and anhydrous acetonitrile (17 mL) was stirred at 90° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was poured over cracked ice/water. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (3×60 mL). The organic layer was washed with sodium hydrogenocarbonate 5%, water and was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel using n-hexane/ethyl acetate (3/1) as eluant to give the title compound (404 mg) as a yellow powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 4.82-6.87 (m, 2H), 4.9-6.95 (m, 1H), 6.0-6.08 (m, 1H), 6.12-6.19 (m, 1H), 6.90 (d, 1H, J=5.2 Hz, H1′), 7.47-7.73 (m, 9H), 7.88-8.12 (m, 6H), 9.10 (s, 1H, H8), 9.90 (s, 1H, H3)
    • Step D: 4-amino-1-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • The compound from Step C (420 mg, 0.7 mmol) was added to a solution of ammonia in methanol and stirred in a steel bomb at 150° C. for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to afford a brown oil which was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water as eluant to give the title compound (50 mg) as a yellow powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.58-4.48 (m, 5H, H2′, H3′, H4′, 2H5′), 5.14-5.68 (m, 3H, 3×OH), 5.90 (s, 1H, H1′), 6.61 (br, 2H, NH2), 8.59 (s, 1H, H8), 9.12 (s, 1H, 3H)
    • Example 6 Synthesis of 1-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00041
  • 1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one (555 mg, 0.9 mmol) was added to a solution of sodium methylate (205 mg) in methanol (25 mL) and stirred at 20° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in water and washed with ethyl acetate. The aqueous layer was concentrated under pressure. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water as eluant to give the title compound (220 mg) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.59-3.62 (m, 2H), 4.02 (m, 1H), 4.11 (m, 1H), 4.22 (m, 1H), 5.16-5.72 (m, 3H, 3×OH), 5.91 (s, 1H, H1′), 8.52 (s, 1H, H8), 8.68 (s, 1H, H3), 12.75 (br, 1H, NH).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 537 (2M+H)+, 269 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 535 (2M+H)+, 267 (M−H)−
    • Example 7 Synthesis of 4-amino-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00042
    • Step A: 1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • To a suspension of imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine (3.48 g, 25.5 mmol) [for preparation see Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, 1969, Vol 6, 93] in dry acetonitrile (35 mL) was added 1,2,3,5-tetra-O-benzoyl-2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranose (14.48 g, 25.0 mmol) at 20° C. and stirred for 15 mn. DBU (11.5 mL, 76.3 mmol) was added at 0° C. and the solution was stirred for 15 mn at 0° C. TMSOTf (24.7 mL, 127.8 mmol) was added at 0° C. and the mixture was heated at 80° C. for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into an aqueous solution of sodium hydrogenocarbonate and extracted by ethyl acetate. The organic layer was evaporated to dryness to give a yellow powder. The crude product was purified on silica gel using dichloromethane/methanol (99.3/0.7) as eluant to give a slight yellow powder which was crystallized from isopropanol to give the title compound (2.45 g) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 1.48 (s, 3H, CH3), 4.75-4.96 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 5.81 (d, 1H, J=5.5 Hz, H3′), 6.99 (s, 1H, H1′), 7.39-7.72 (m, 9H), 7.92-8.08 (m, 6H), 8.64 (s, 1H, H8), 8.71 (s, 1H, H3), 12.89 (br, 1H, NH).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 1189 (2M+H)+, 585 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 593 (M−H)−
    • Step B: 4-chloro-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • A solution containing the compound from Step A (300 mg, 0.50 mmol), the N,N-diethylaniline (1.2 mL) and freshly distilled phosphorus chloride (24 mL) was stirred at reflux for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. Dichloromethane was added to the residue and the organic layer poured over cracked ice/water. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was washed with sodium hydrogenocarbonate 5%, water and was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel using diethyl ether/petrol ether (1/1) as eluant to give the title compound (295 mg) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 1.5 (s, 3H, CH3), 4.8-5.0 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 5.85 (d, 1H, J=5.5 Hz, H3′), 7.15 (s, 1H, H1′), 7.38-8.08 (m, 15H), 9.15 (s, 1H, H8), 9.90 (s, 1H, H3)
    • Step C: 4-amino-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • The compound from Step B (590 mg, 0.96 mmol) was added to a solution of ammonia in methanol and stirred in a steel bomb at 150° C. for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to remove methanol. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water as eluant to give the title compound (35 mg) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.70 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.64-3.98 (m, 4H, H3′, H4′, 2H5′), 5.23-5.44 (m, 3H, 3OH), 5.98 (s, 1H, H1′), 6.63 (br, 2H, NH2), 8.68 (s, 1H, H8), 9.05 (s, 1H, H3)
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 155, 143, 132, 131, 129, 93, 83, 79, 72, 20.
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 282 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 280 (M−H)−
    • Example 8 Synthesis of the 4-substituted-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5d]pyridazine
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00043
    W Step A products
    OH NaOMe, MeOH 100° C., 24 h
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00044
    Cl NH3/MeOH 20° C., 48 h
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00045
    • 1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazin-4-one
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 1.17 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.44-3.59 (m, 1H), 3.68-3.78 (m, 1H), 3.86-3.94 (m, 1H), 4.11-4.21 (m, 1H), 4.8-5.4 (m, 3H, 3OH), 6.05 (s, 1H, H1′), 8.35 (s, 1H, H8), 8.37 (s, 1H, H3), 12.67 (br, 1H, NH).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 283 (2M+H)+, 281 (M+H)+
    • 4-chloro-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.72 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.69-4.06 (m, 4H, H3′, H4′, 2H5′), 5.34-5.51 (m, 3H, 3OH), 6.19 (s, 1H, H1′), 9.18 (s, 1H, H8), 9.87 (s, 1H, H3)
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 301 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 299 (M−H)−
    • Example 9 Synthesis of the 4,7-diamino-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides Derivatives
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00046
    Step A:
  • To a suspension of 4,5-dicyanoimidazole (1 eq.) [for preparation see Journal of Organic Chemistry, 1976, Vol 41, 713] in dry DMF (0.2 M) was added the protected β-D-ribofuranose derivatives (1 eq.) at 20° C. DBU (3 eq.) was added at 0 C and the solution was stirred for 20 mn at 0° C. TMSOTf (4 eq.) was added at 0° C. and the mixture was heated at 60° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was poured into an aqueous solution of sodium hydrogenocarbonate and extracted by dichloromethane. The organic layer was evaporated to dryness to give a yellow powder. The crude product was purified on silica gel using diethyl ether/petrol ether as eluant to give the title compound (see the following table 1).
  • Step B:
  • The compound from Step A (1 eq.) was stirred with hydrazine monohydrate (20 eq.) and acetic acid (1.4 eq.) at 75° C. for several hours (see the following table 1). The reaction mixture was poured into water. The aqueous layer was washed by dichloromethane and evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column to give the title compound (see the following table 1).
    TABLE 1
    R products from Step A yield (Step A) experiments (Step B) products from Step B yield (Step A)
    H
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00047
         		63% 75° C. for 1.5 h
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00048
         		58% (white powder)
    CH3
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00049
         		62% 75° C. for 20 h.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00050
         		15% (white powder)
    • 4,7-diamino-1-β-D-ribofuranosylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.58-4.32 (m, 5H, H2′, H3′, H4′, 2H5′), 5.10-5.90 (br, 7H, 2NH2, 3OH), 6.11 (s, 1H, H1′), 8.50 (s, 1H, H8)
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 151, 144, 142, 132, 122, 89, 86, 75, 70, 61.
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 283 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 281 (M−H)−
    • 4,7-diamino-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.75 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.67-3.76 (m, 1H), 3.84-3.94 (m, 3H), 5.32 (m, 3H, 3OH), 5.43 (br, 1H, NH2), 5.71 (br, 1H, NH2), 6.21 (s,1H, H1′), 8.78 (s, 1H, H8)
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 151, 144, 142, 132, 123, 92, 83, 78, 71, 59, 20.
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 593 (2M+H)+, 297 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 295 (M−H)−
    • Example 10 Synthesis of 4,7-disubstituted-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00051
    • Step A: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the protected 4,7-dichloroimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • The 4,7-dichloroimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine [for preparation see Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, 1968, Vol 5, 13] (1 eq.) was heated at reflux in hexamethyldisilazane for 12 hours. The mixture was evaporated to dryness to give a solid which was dissolved in 1,2-dichloroethane. The protected β-D-ribofuranose derivatives (1.1 eq.) and stannic chloride (1.4 eq.) were added at 20° C. and the solution was stirred for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into an aqueous solution of sodium hydrogenocarbonate, filtrated through a pad of celite and washed by dichloromethane. The organic layer was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel using dichloromethane/acetone (40/1) as eluant to give the title compound (see the following table 2).
    • Step B: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the 4,7-dichloroimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • The compound from Step A (1 eq.) was stirred with sodium methoxide (0.1 eq.) in methanol for several hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure. Water was added to the residue. The aqueous layer was washed by ethyl acetate and was evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column to give the title compound (see the following table 2).
    • Step C: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • A mixture of the compound from Step A (1 eq.), palladium on charcoal (10%), sodium acetate (4.2 eq.) in acetyl acetate was stirred under hydrogen until the compound from Step A was consumed. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure and was purified on silica gel to give the title protected compound which was stirred with sodium methoxide (3.3 eq.) in methanol. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure. Water was added to the residue. The aqueous layer was washed by ethyl acetate and was evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column to give the title compound (see the following table 2).
    • Step D: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the chloro-methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • The compound from Step A (1 eq.) was stirred with sodium methoxide (3.3 eq.) in methanol 0.3M at 20° C. for several hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure. Water was added to the residue. The aqueous layer was washed by ethyl acetate and was evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column to give a compound whose regioselectivity was not given (see the following table 2).
    • Step E: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • A mixture of the compound from Step D (1 eq.), palladium on charcoal (10%), sodium acetate (4.2 eq.) in water/ethanol (1/1) was stirred under hydrogen until the compound from Step A was consumed. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure and was purified on reverse-phase column to give the title compound whose regioselectivity was not given (see the following table 2).
    • Step F: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the Protected 4,7-diazidoimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • The compound from Step A (1 eq.) was treated at 50° C. with sodium azide (1.5 eq.) in DMF. Water was added to the mixture. The aqueous layer was extracted by ethyl acetate. The organic layer was evaporated under pressure. The crude product was purified on silica gel using diethyl ether/petrol ether (7/3) as eluant to give the title compound (see the following table 2).
    • Step G: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the azido-methoxy-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • The compound from Step F (1 eq.) was stirred at 50° C. with sodium methoxide (1 eq.) in methanol. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure. Water was added to the residue. The aqueous layer was washed by ethyl acetate and was evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column using water/acetonitrile as eluant to give the title compound whose regioselectivity was not given (see the following table 2).
    • Step H: Typical Procedure for the Preparation of the amino-azido-imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine nucleosides
  • A mixture of the compound from Step F (1 eq.), palladium on charcoal (10%), sodium acetate (4.2 eq.) in ethyl acetate was stirred under hydrogen until the compound from Step F was consumed. The reaction mixture was filtrated over celite and was evaporated under pressure The crude product was purified on silica gel to give the title protected compound whose regioselectivity was not given (see the following table 1). This compound was stirred with sodium methoxide (3 eq.) in methanol. The reaction mixture was evaporated under pressure. Water was added to the residue. The aqueous layer was washed by ethyl acetate and was evaporated under pressure. The residue was purified on reverse-phase column to give the title compound whose regioselectivity was not given (see the following table 2).
    TABLE 2
    experi-
    ments products yield
    Step A
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00052
         		60% (white powder)
    Step A
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00053
         		34% (white powder)
    Step B
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00054
         		     (white powder)
    Step C
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00055
         		71% (white powder)
    Step D
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00056
         		55% (white powder)
    Step E
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00057
         		55% (white powder)
    Step F
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00058
         		50% (yellow powder)
    Step F
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00059
         		50% (yellow powder)
    Step G
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00060
         		36% (beige powder)
    Step H
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00061
         		98% (white powder)
    Step H
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00062
         		49% (white powder)
    • 4,7-dichloro-1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 4.8-5.0 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 6.05 (s, 1H, H3′), 6.25 (s, 1H, H2′), 7.1 (d, 1H, J=4 Hz, H1′), 7.4-8.0 (m, 15H), 9.25 (s, 1H, H8).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 633 (M+H)+
    • 4,7-dichloro-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 1.65 (s, 3H, CH3), 4.9-5.0 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 5.8 (s, 1H, H3′), 7.35-8.05 (m, 16H including H1′), 9.3 (s, 1H, H8).
    • 4,7-dichloro-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.84 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.77 (m, 1H), 3.88-4.04 (m, 3H), 5.30-5.60 (m, 3H, OH), 6.5 (s, 1H, H1′), 9.44 (s, 1H, H8).
    • 1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.80 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.75 (m, 1H), 3.80-4.00 (m, 3H), 5.40 (br, 3H, OH), 6.2 (s, 1H, H1′), 9.0 (s, 1H), 9.65 (s, 1H), 9.85 (s, 1H).
    • 7-chloro-4-methoxy-1-β-D-ribofuranosylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine or 4-chloro-7-methoxy-1-β-D-ribofuranosylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.6-4.5 (m, 8H, 2H5′, H4′, H3′, H2′, OCH3), 5.40 (m, 3H, OH), 6.2 (s, 1H, H1′), 9.0 (s, 1H, H8).
  • 675 (2M+H)+, Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 317 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 315 (M−H)−
    • 4-methoxy-1-β-D-ribofuranosylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine or 7-methoxy-1-β-D-ribofuranosylimidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.54-3.79 (m, 2H), 3.95 (m, 1H), 4.15 (m, 1H, H3′), 4.2 (s, 3H, OCH3), 4.4 (m, 1H, H2′), 5.05-5.70 (m, 3H, OH), 6.2 (d, 1H, J=4.8 Hz, H1′), 8.95 (s, 1H), 9.3 (s, 1H).
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 154, 145, 143, 142, 121, 90, 85, 75, 70, 61, 55.
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 283 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 281 (M−H)−
    • 4,7-diazido-1-(2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 4.81-5.1 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 6.24-6.49 (m, 2H, H2′, H3′), 7.2 (d, 1H, J=5 Hz, H1′), 7.4-8.0 (m, 15H), 9.12 (s, 1H, H8).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 647 (M+H)+
    • 4,7-diazido-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 1.6 (s, 3H, CH3), 4.96 (m, 3H, H4′, 2H5′), 6.02 (m, 1H, H3′), 7.24 (s, 1H, H1′), 7.40-7.52 (m, 6H), 7.60-7.71 (m, 3H), 7.93-8.1 (m, 6H), 9/10 (s, 1H, H8).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 661 (M+H)+
    • 4-azido-7-methoxy-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine or 7-azido-4-methoxy-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.75 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.70-3.98 (m, 2H), 4.05 (m, 2H), 4.2 (s, 3H, OCH3), 5.32-5.61 (br, 3H, OH), 6.36 (d, 1H, J=5.7 Hz, H1′), 9.18 (s, 1H, H8),
  • 13C NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 ppm: 156, 143, 136, 129, 123, 94, 83, 79, 71, 59, 57, 20.
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 675 (2M+H)+, 338 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 673 (2M−H)−, 336 (M−H)
    • 4-amino-7-azido-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine or 7-amino-4-azido-1-(2-C-methyl-2,3,5-tri-O-Benzoyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 01.64 (s, 3H, CH3), 4.95 (m, 3H), 6.06 (m, 1H, H3′), 7.18 (s, 1H, H1′), 7.40-7.52 (m, 6H), 7.63-7.74 (m, 5H, including NH2), 7.91-8.04 (m, 6H), 8.96 (s, 1H, H8),
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 1269 (2M+H)+, 635 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 633 (M−H)−
    • 4-amino-7-azido-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine or 7-amino-4-azido-1-(2-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]pyridazine
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 0.75 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.65-4.15 (m, 4H), 5.30-5.55 (br, 3H, 3×OH), 6.27 (s, 1H, H1′), 7.63 (br, 2H, NH2), 9.03 (s, 1H, H8),
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 323 (M+H)+, (FAB<0) 321 (M−H)
    • Example 11 Synthesis of 4-amino-6-substituted-imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine nucleosides
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00063
    • Step A: 4-amino-6-bromo-7-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine
  • The 2-azaadenosine [for preparation see Patent WO 01/16149. 2001] (70 mg, 0.26 mmol) was added to a solution of sodium acetate 0.5M (1.4 mL). The solution was heated until the 2-azaadenosine was solubilized. A solution of bromine (100 μL of Br2 in 10 mL of water) (6.3 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 3 days. A second portion of the bromine's solution (6.3 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water/acetonitrile (9/1) as eluant to give the title compound as a yellow powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.55 (m, 1H, H5′), 3.71 (m, 1H, H5′), 4.01 (m, 1H, H4′), 4.31 (m, 1H, H3′), 5.17 (m, 1H, H2′), 5.19 (m, 1H, OH), 5.36 (m, 1H, OH), 5.58 (m, 1H, OH), 5.93 (d, 1H, J=6.47 Hz, H1′), 8.08 (br, 2H, NH2).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) 349 (M+2H)+, m/z (FAB<0) 345 (M−2H)−.
    • Step B: 4-amino-6-methyl-7-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine
  • The compound from Step A (112 mg, 0.3 mmol) was heated at reflux in hexamethyldisilazane (15 mL) for 16 hours. The mixture was evaporated to dryness to give a syrup which was dissolved in dry THF (12 mL). PPh3 (10 mg; 0.04 mmol), PdCl2 (3.5 mg; 0.02 mmol) and AlMe3 (100 μl; 0.94 mmol) were added. The mixture was reflux for 5 hours. The mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was dissolved in methanol (30 mL) in the presence of ammonium chloride. The mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water/acetonitrile (from 9/1 to 6/4) as eluant to give the title compound (35 mg) as a yellow powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 2.67 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.60 (m, 1H, H5′), 3.72 (m, 1H, H5′), 4.03 (m, 1H, H4′), 4.24 (m, 1H, H3′), 4.93 (m, 1H, H2′), 5.48 (m, 3H, OH), 5.92 (d, 1H, J=6.82 Hz, H1′), 7.78 (br, 2H, NH2).
  • Mass spectrum: m/z (FAB>0) (FAB>0) 283 (M+H)+, m/z (FAB<0) 281 (M−H)−.
    • Example 12 Synthesis of imidazo[4,5d]-triazin-4-one nucleosides
  • Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00064
    • Step A: 7-(β-D-Ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazin-4-one
  • The AICAR [for preparation see Synthesis, 2003, No 17, 2639] (1 g, 3.87 mmol) was added to a solution of chlorhydrique acid 6N (25 mL) at −30° C. A solution of sodium nitrite 3M (4 ml, 11.62 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at −30° for 2 hours. A pre-cooled (−30° C.) solution of ethanol (25 mL) was added. A solution of ammonia (28%) was added at −20° C. to pH=7. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel reverse-phase (C18) using water as eluant to give the title compound (0.81 gr) as a white powder.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 3.58 (d, 1H, J=11.85 Hz, H5′), 3.70 (d, 1H, J=11.85 Hz, H5′), 4.00 (dd, 1H, J=3.92 Hz, 4.02 Hz, H4′), 4.18 (dd, 1H, J=4.27 Hz, 4.78 Hz, H3′), 4.54 (dd, 1H, J=4.86 Hz, 5.19 Hz, H2′), 5.18 (br, 1H, OH), 5.35 (br, 1H, OH), 5.73 (br, 1H, OH), 6.08 (d, 1H, J=5.11 Hz, H1′), 8.65 (s, 1H, H8).
    • Step B: 7-(2,3,5-Tri-O-acétyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazin-4-one
  • The compound from Step A (1.68 gr, 6.24 mmol) was stirred in pyridine (20 mL). The anhydride acetic (2.3 ml , 25 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was evaporated to dryness to give a syrup which was dissolved in water. The aqueous layer was extracted by acetyl acetate. The organic layer was evaporated to dryness to give the title compound (1.5 gr) as a brown foam.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ ppm: 2.04 (s, 3H, COCH3), 2.09 (s, 3H, COCH3), 2.10 (s, 3H, COCH3), 4.39 (m, 3H, 2×H5′ et H4′), 5.53 (dd, 1H, J=4.39 Hz, 5.4 Hz, H3′), 5.80 (t, 1H, J=5.4 Hz, H2′), 6.26 (d, 1H, J=5,4 Hz, H1′), 8.15 (s, 1H, H8).
    • Example 13 Alternative Methods for Ribofuranosyl-Purine Analogues Synthesis I. Preparation of 4-methylamino-7-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine
  • The 4-methylamino-7-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine Va may be prepared according the following synthesis, where the starting material used is the AICAR I. The AICAR may be prepared according to the published synthesis of Y. Yamamoto and N. Kohyama, Synthesis, 2003, 17:2639-2646.
  • The other synthesis of 4-methylamino-7-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine Va was described from 2-azainosine II according to the published synthesis of L. Towsend and Co, Nucleosides, Nucleotides & Nucleic Acids, 2000, 19(1&2):39-68.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00065
    • II. Preparation of 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy-β-D-glycero-pentofuranosyl)-imidazo-[4,5-d]-ν-triazine Derivative Compounds
  • The 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy-β-D-glycero-pentofuranosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine compounds IXa, IXb and IXc may be prepared according the following synthesis according to the published synthesis of R. Panzica and Co, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1999, 7:2373-2379.
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00066
    • III. Preparation of 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy-β-D-glycero-pent-2-ene-furanosyl)-imidazo-[4,5-d]-ν-triazine Derivative Compounds
  • The 4-substituted-7-(2,3-dideoxy-β-D-glycero-pent-2-ene-furanosyl)imidazo[4,5-d]-ν-triazine derivative compounds XIa, XIb and XIc may be prepared according the following synthesis:
    Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00067
    • Example 14 Phosphorylation Assay of Nucleoside to Active Triphosphate
  • To determine the cellular metabolism of the compounds, HepG2 cells are obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, Md.), and are grown in 225 cm2 tissue culture flasks in minimal essential medium supplemented with non-essential amino acids, 1% penicillin-streptomycin. The medium is renewed every three days, and the cells are subcultured once a week. After detachment of the adherent monolayer with a 10 minute exposure to 30 mL of trypsin-EDTA and three consecutive washes with medium, confluent HepG2 cells are seeded at a density of 2.5×106 cells per well in a 6-well plate and exposed to 10 μM of [3H] labeled active compound (500 dpm/pmol) for the specified time periods. The cells are maintained at 37° C. under a 5% CO2 atmosphere. At the selected time points, the cells are washed three times with ice-cold phosphate-buffered saline (PS). Intracellular active compound and its respective metabolites are extracted by incubating the cell pellet overnight at −20° C. with 60% methanol followed by extraction with an additional 20 μL of cold methanol for one hour in an ice bath. The extracts are then combined, dried under gentle filtered air flow and stored at −20° C. until HPLC analysis.
    • Example 15 Bioavailability Assay in Cynomolgus Monkeys
  • Within 1 week prior to the study initiation, the cynomolgus monkey is surgically implanted with a chronic venous catheter and sucutaneous venous access port (VAP) to facilitate lood collection and underwent a physical examination including hematology and serum chemistry evaluations and the body weight was recorded. Each monkey (six total) receives approximately 250 μCi of 3H activity with each dose of active compound at a dose level of 10 mg/kg at a dose concentration of 5 mg/mL, either via an intravenous olus (3 monkeys, IV), or via oral gavage (3 monkeys, PO). Each dosing syringe is weighed efore dosing to gravimetrically determine the quantity of formulation administered. Urine samples are collected via pan catch at the designated intervals (approximately 18-0 hours pre-dose, 0-4, 4-8 and 8-12 hours post-dosage) and processed. blood samples are collected as well (pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 12 and 24 hours post-dosage) via the chronic venous catheter and VAP or from a peripheral vessel if the chronic venous catheter procedure should not be possible. The blood and urine samples are analyzed for the maximum concentration (Cmax), time when the maximum concentration is achieved (Tmax), area under the curve (AUC), half life of the dosage concentration (T1/2), clearance (CL), steady state volume and distribution (VSS) and bioavailability (F).
    • Example 16 Bone Marrow Toxicity Assay
  • Human one marrow cells are collected from normal healthy volunteers and the mononuclear population are separated by Ficoll-Hypaque gradient centrifugation as described previously by Sommadossi J-P, Carlisle R. “Toxicity of 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine and 9-(1,3-dihydroxy-2-propoxymethyl)guanine for normal human hematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro” Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 1987; 31:452-454; and Sommadossi J-P, Schinazi R F, Chu C K, Xie M-Y. “Comparison of cytotoxicity of the (−)- and (+)-enantiomer of 2′,3′-dideoxy-3′-thiacytidine in normal human one marrow progenitor cells” Biochemical Pharmacology 1992; 44:1921-1925. The culture assays for CFU-GM and FU-E are performed using a bilayer soft agar or methylcellulose method. Drugs are diluted in tissue culture medium and filtered. After 14 to 18 days at 37° C. in a humidified atmosphere of 5% CO2 in air, colonies of greater than 50 cells are counted using an inverted microscope. The results are presented as the percent inhiition of colony formation in the presence of drug compared to solvent control cultures.
    • Example 17 Mitochondria Toxicity Assay
  • HepG2 cells are cultured in 12-well plates as described above and exposed to various concentrations of drugs as taught by Pan-Zhou X-R, Cui L, Zhou X-J, Sommadossi J-P, Darley-Usmer V M. “Differential effects of antiretroviral nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial function in HepG2 cells” Antimicro Agents Chemother 2000; 44:496-503. Lactic acid levels in the culture medium after 4 day drug exposure are measured using a Boehringer lactic acid assay kit. Lactic acid levels are normalized by cell number as measured by hemocytometer count.
    • Example 18 Cytotoxicity Assay
  • Cells are seeded at a rate of between 5×103 and 5×104/well into 96-well plates in growth medium overnight at 37° C. in a humidified CO2 (5%) atmosphere. New growth medium containing serial dilutions of the drugs is then added. After incubation 5 for 4 days, cultures are fixed in 50% TCA and stained with sulforhodamine. The optical density was read at 550 nm. The cytotoxic concentration was expressed as the concentration required to reduce the cell numer by 50% (CC50). The preliminary results are tabulated in the Table 3 below.
    TABLE 3
    MDK versus Human Hepatoma
    CC50, μM
    Compound MDK
    β-D-4′-CH3-riboG >250
    β-D-4′-CH3-ribo-4-thioU >250
    β-D-4′-CH3-riboC >250
    β-D-4′-CH3-ribo-5-fluoroU >167
    β-D-4′-CH3-riboT >250
    β-D-4′-CH3-riboA >250
  • This invention has been described with reference to its preferred embodiments. Variations and modifications of the invention will be obvious to those skilled in the art from the foregoing detailed description of the invention. It is intended that all of these variations and modifications be included within the scope of this invention.

Claims (67)

1. A method of treating a host infected with a flavivirus or pestivirus, comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-pestivirus or anti-flavivirus biologically active ribofuranonucleoside of Formula (I):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00068
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
R is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
n is 0-2;
such than when X is CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, CH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2,
then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted; and
such that when X is O, S[O]n, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen,
then each R1 and R1+ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), halogenated alkyl, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —C(H)═N—NH2, C(S)NH2, C(S)NH(alkyl), or C(S)N(alkyl)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
each R2 and R3 independently is OH, NH2, SH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)NH2, NC, C(O)OH, SCN, OCN, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
each R2′ and R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00069
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00070
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, CN4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2;
with the caveat that when X is S, then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one.
2. A method of treating a host infected with a flavivirus or pestivirus, comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-pestivirus or anti-flavivirus biologically active ribofuranonucleoside of Formula (II):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00071
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
X* is CY3;
Y3 is hydrogen, alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, azido, cyano, alkenyl, alkynyl, —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), CF3, —CONH2, —CONH(alkyl), or —CON(alkyl)2;
R is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate;
R1 is H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl. —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), or —C(O)N(alkyl)2, wherein an optional substitution on alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may be one or more halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy or alkylthio groups taken in any combination;
each R2 and R3 independently is OH, NH2, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
each R2′ and R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00072
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00073
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
3. A method of treating a host infected with a flavivirus or pestivirus, comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-pestivirus or anti-flavivirus biologically active ribofuranonucleoside of Formula (III):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00074
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
n is 0-2;
each R2′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00075
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00076
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
4. The method of claim 3, wherein R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, CF3, azido, or cyano.
5. The method of claim 3, wherein R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, or CF3.
6. The method of claim 3, wherein R2′ is CH3 or CF3.
7. The method of claim 3, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate.
8. The method of claim 3, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H.
9. The method of claim 3, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
10. The method of claim 3, wherein X is O or S.
11. The method of claim 3, wherein X is O.
12. A method of treating a host infected with a flavivirus or pestivirus, comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-pestivirus or anti-flavivirus biologically active ribofuranonucleoside of Formula (IV):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00077
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, mono, di, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
n is 0-2;
each R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00078
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00079
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, CF3, azido, or cyano.
14. The method of claim 12, wherein R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, or CF3.
15. The method of claim 12, wherein R3′ is CH3 or CF3.
16. The method of claim 12, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate.
17. The method of claim 12, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H.
18. The method of claim 12, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
19. The method of claim 12, wherein X is O or S.
20. The method of claim 12, wherein X is O.
21. The method of one of claims 3 or 12 wherein the host is a mammal.
22. The method of claim 21, wherein the mammal is a human.
23. The method of one of claims 3 or 12, further comprising administering an antivirally effective amount of the compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, in combination or alternation with one or more additional antivirally effective agents.
24. The method of claim 23 wherein the additional antivirally effective agent is selected from the group consisting of an interferon, ribavirin, an interleukin, an NS3 protease inhibitor, a cysteine protease inhibitor, phenanthrenequinone, a thiazolidine derivative, a thiazolidine and a benzanilide, a helicase inhibitor, a polymerase inhibitor, a nucleotide analogue, gliotoxin, cerulenin, an antisense phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotide, an inhibitor of IRES-dependent translation, and a ribozyme.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein the additional antivirally effective agent is an interferon.
26. The method of claim 25 wherein the additional antivirally effective agent is selected from the group consisting of pegylated interferon alpha 2a, interferon alphacon-1, natural interferon, albuferon, interferon beta-1a, omega interferon, interferon alpha, interferon gamma, interferon tau, interferon delta and interferon gamma-1b.
27. The method of one of claims 3 and 12, wherein the compound is in the form of a dosage unit.
28. The method of claim 27 wherein the dosage unit contains 50 to 1000 mg of the compound.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the said dosage unit is a tablet or capsule.
30. The method of one of claims 3 or 12, wherein the compound is in substantially pure form.
31. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound is at least 90% by weight of the β-D-isomer.
32. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound is at least 95% by weight of the β-D-isomer.
33. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound is at least 90% by weight of the β-L-isomer.
34. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound is at least 95% by weight of the β-L-isomer.
35. A compound of the general structure of Formula (I):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00080
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
R is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
n is 0-2;
such than when X is CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, CH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2,
then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted; and
such that when X is O, S[O]n, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, or SCH-halogen,
then each R1 and R1′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), halogenated alkyl, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —C(H)═N—NH2, C(S)NH2, C(S)NH(alkyl), or C(S)N(alkyl)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl and/or alkynyl may optionally be substituted;
each R2 and R3 independently is OH, NH2, SH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), —OC(O)NH2, NC, C(O)OH, SCN, OCN, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
each R2′ and R3, independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00081
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00082
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2;
with the caveat that when X is S, then the compound is not 5-(4-amino-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-7-yl)-2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-3-ol or 7-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxy-methyl-tetrahydro-thiophen-2-yl)-3,7-dihydro-imidazo[4,5-d][1,2,3]triazin-4-one.
36. A compound of the general structure of Formula (II):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00083
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
X* is CY3;
Y3 is hydrogen, alkyl, bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, azido, cyano, alkenyl, alkynyl, —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), CF3, —CONH2, —CONH(alkyl), or —CON(alkyl)2;
R is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate;
R1 is H, OH, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, azido, cyano, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), —O(alkynyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl, —NO2, —NH2, —NH(lower alkyl), —N(lower alkyl)2, —NH(acyl), —N(acyl)2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), or —C(O)N(alkyl)2, wherein an optional substitution on alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl may be one or more halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy or alkylthio groups taken in any combination;
each R2 and R3 independently is OH, NH2, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, NO2, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, N3, optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, halogenated alkyl, —C(O)O-(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O-(alkenyl), —C(O)O-(alkynyl), an amino acid residue or derivative, a prodrug or leaving group that provides OH in vivo, or an optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclic ring having O, S and/or N independently as a heteroatom taken alone or in combination;
each R2′ and R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), and —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2, and R3 at 3′-C may also be OH; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00084
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00085
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
37. A compound of the general structure of Formula (III):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00086
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
n is 0-2;
each R2′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00087
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00088
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
38. The compound of claim 37, wherein R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, CF3, azido, or cyano.
39. The compound of claim 37, wherein R2′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, or CF3.
40. The compound of claim 37, wherein R2′ is CH3 or CF3.
41. The compound of claim 37, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate.
42. The compound of claim 37, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H.
43. The compound of claim 37, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
44. The compound of claim 37, wherein X is O or S.
45. The compound of claim 37, wherein X is O.
46. A compound of the general structure of Formula (IV):
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00089
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:
each R, R2*, and R3* independently is H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate; optionally substituted alkyl, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl or alkynyl, acyl, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(O)(lower alkyl), —C(O)-(alkenyl), —C(O)-(alkynyl), lipid, phospholipid, carbohydrate, peptide, cholesterol, an amino acid residue or derivative, or other pharmaceutically acceptable leaving group that is capable of providing H or phosphate when administered in vivo;
X is O, S[O]n, CH2, CHOH, CH-alkyl, CH-alkenyl, CH-alkynyl, C-dialkyl, CH—O-alkyl, CH—O-alkenyl, CH—O-alkynyl, CH—S-alkyl, CH—S-alkenyl, CH—S-alkynyl, NH, N-alkyl, N-alkenyl, N-alkynyl, S(O)N-alkyl, S(O)N-alkenyl, S(O)N-alkynyl, SCH-halogen, or C-(halogen)2, wherein alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally may be substituted;
n is 0-2;
each R3′ independently is H; optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; —C(O)O(alkyl), —C(O)O(lower alkyl), —C(O)O(alkenyl), —C(O)O(alkynyl), —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NH(alkyl), —C(O)N(alkyl)2, —OH, —O(acyl), —O(lower acyl), —O(alkyl), —O(lower alkyl), —O(alkenyl), halogen, halogenated alkyl and particularly CF3, azido, cyano, NO2, —S(alkyl), —S(alkenyl), —S(alkynyl), NH2, —NH(alkyl), —N(alkyl)2, —NH(alkenyl), —NH(alkynyl), —NH(acyl), or —N(acyl)2; and
Base is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00090
Figure US20050075309A1-20050407-C00091
wherein
each R′ and R″ independently is H, C1-6 alkyl, C2 6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, halogen, halogenated alkyl, OH, CN, N3, carboxy, C1-4alkoxycarbonyl, NH2, C1-4 alkylamino, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, (C1-4 alkyl)0-2 aminomethyl;
each W is Cl, Br, I, F, halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, OH, SH, O-alkyl, S-alkyl, O-alkenyl, O-alkynyl, S-alkenyl, S-alkynyl, —OC(O)NR4R4, O-acyl, S-acyl, CN, SCN, OCN, NO2, N3, NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, NH-cycloalkyl, NH-acyl, NH═NH, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2; and
each R4 is independently H, acyl, or C1-6 alkyl;
each Z is O, S, NH, N—OH, N—NH2, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, N-cycloalkyl, alkoxy, CN, SCN, OCN, SH, NO2, NH2, N3, NH═NH, NH(alkyl), N(alkyl)2, CONH2, CONH(alkyl), or CON(alkyl)2.
47. The compound of claim 46, wherein R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, CF3, azido, or cyano.
48. The compound of claim 46, wherein R3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; halogen, halogenated alkyl, CH3, or CF3.
49. The compound of claim 46, wherein R3′ is CH3 or CF3.
50. The compound of claim 46, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, mono-, di-, or triphosphate, a stabilized phosphate, or phosphonate.
51. The compound of claim 46, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H.
52. The compound of claim 46, wherein each R, R2*, and R3* is independently H, acyl, or an amino acid acyl residue.
53. The compound of claim 46, wherein X is O or S.
54. The compound of claim 46, wherein X is O.
55. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-virally effective amount of a compound of one of claims 37 or 46, optionally with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
56. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 55 wherein the compound, salt or prodrug thereof is in the form of a dosage unit.
57. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 56 wherein the dosage unit contains from about 0.01 to about 50 mg of the compound.
58. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 57, wherein said dosage unit is a tablet or capsule.
59. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 55, further comprising one or more additional anti-virally effective agents.
60. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 59, wherein the additional anti-virally agent is selected from the group consisting of an interferon, ribavirin, an interleukin, an NS3 protease inhibitor, a cysteine protease inhibitor, a thiazolidine derivative, a thiazolidine and a benzanilide, phenanthrenequinone, a helicase inhibitor, a polymerase inhibitor, a nucleotide analogue, gliotoxin, cerulenin, an antisense oligodeoxynucleotide, an inhibitor of IRES-dependent translation, and a ribozyme.
61. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 60 wherein the additional anti-virally effective agent is an interferon.
62. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 61, wherein the additional anti-virally effective agent is selected from the group consisting of pegylated interferon alpha 2a, interferon alphacon-1, natural interferon, albuferon, interferon beta-1a, omega interferon, interferon alpha, interferon gamma, interferon tau, interferon delta and interferon gamma-1b.
63. The pharmaceutical composition of one of claims 37 or 46, wherein the compound is in substantially pure form.
64. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 63, wherein the compound is at least 90% by weight of the β-D-isomer.
65. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 63, wherein the compound is at least 95% by weight of the β-D-isomer.
66. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 63 wherein the compound is at least 90% by weight of the β-L-isomer.
67. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 63 wherein the compound is at least 95% by weight of the β-L-isomer.
US10/900,008 2003-07-25 2004-07-26 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C Abandoned US20050075309A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/900,008 US20050075309A1 (en) 2003-07-25 2004-07-26 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C
US12/270,795 US8742101B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2008-11-13 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C
US14/269,003 US9186369B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2014-05-02 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US49021603P 2003-07-25 2003-07-25
US10/900,008 US20050075309A1 (en) 2003-07-25 2004-07-26 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/270,795 Continuation US8742101B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2008-11-13 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20050075309A1 true US20050075309A1 (en) 2005-04-07

Family

ID=34102969

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/900,008 Abandoned US20050075309A1 (en) 2003-07-25 2004-07-26 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating Flaviviridae including hepatitis C
US12/270,795 Active 2025-12-21 US8742101B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2008-11-13 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C
US14/269,003 Active US9186369B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2014-05-02 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/270,795 Active 2025-12-21 US8742101B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2008-11-13 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C
US14/269,003 Active US9186369B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2014-05-02 Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C

Country Status (17)

Country Link
US (3) US20050075309A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1658302B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2007501185A (en)
KR (1) KR20060084845A (en)
CN (1) CN1852915A (en)
AT (1) ATE478886T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2004258750A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0412849A (en)
CA (1) CA2533367C (en)
DE (1) DE602004028841D1 (en)
DK (1) DK1658302T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2351603T3 (en)
NO (1) NO20060914L (en)
PL (1) PL1658302T3 (en)
PT (1) PT1658302E (en)
RU (1) RU2006105640A (en)
WO (1) WO2005009418A2 (en)

Cited By (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050009737A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2005-01-13 Jeremy Clark Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US20060122146A1 (en) * 2004-09-14 2006-06-08 Byoung-Kwon Chun Preparation of 2'-fluoro-2'-alkyl-substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20060199783A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2006-09-07 Pharmassett, Inc. Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-D-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20080182895A1 (en) * 2006-08-25 2008-07-31 Howe Anita Y M Identification and characterization of hcv replicon variants with reduced susceptibility to hcv-796, and methods related thereto
US20090209481A1 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-08-20 Roche Palo Alto Llc Nucleoside prodrugs and uses thereof
US20100016251A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2010-01-21 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US20100081628A1 (en) * 2008-06-11 2010-04-01 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US8551973B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-10-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside analogs
US8563530B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2013-10-22 Gilead Pharmassel LLC Purine nucleoside phosphoramidate
US8618076B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2013-12-31 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8629263B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2014-01-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8716262B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8716263B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8841275B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2014-09-23 Gilead Pharmasset Llc 2′-spiro-nucleosides and derivatives thereof useful for treating hepatitis C virus and dengue virus infections
US8859756B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2014-10-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Stereoselective synthesis of phosphorus containing actives
US8889159B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2014-11-18 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Compositions and methods for treating hepatitis C virus
US9393256B2 (en) 2011-09-16 2016-07-19 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Methods for treating HCV
US9994600B2 (en) 2014-07-02 2018-06-12 Ligand Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Prodrug compounds and uses therof
US10039779B2 (en) 2013-01-31 2018-08-07 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
CN109384727A (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-26 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Phthalazines ketone compounds, preparation method, pharmaceutical composition and purposes
US10449210B2 (en) 2014-02-13 2019-10-22 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Inc. Prodrug compounds and their uses
US11116783B2 (en) 2013-08-27 2021-09-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds

Families Citing this family (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1658302B1 (en) * 2003-07-25 2010-08-25 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Purine nucleoside analogues for treating diseases caused by flaviviridae including hepatitis c
JP5055564B2 (en) 2004-06-15 2012-10-24 メルク・シャープ・エンド・ドーム・コーポレイション C-purine nucleoside analogues as inhibitors of RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase
CA2600359A1 (en) * 2005-03-09 2006-09-09 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Nucleosides with non-natural bases as anti-viral agents
WO2007041775A1 (en) * 2005-10-10 2007-04-19 The University Of Queensland Cysteine protease inhibitors incorporating azide groups
BRPI0619563A2 (en) 2005-12-09 2011-10-04 Pharmasset Inc antiviral nucleosides
JP2009532411A (en) 2006-04-04 2009-09-10 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー 3 ', 5'-di-O-acylated nucleosides for HCV treatment
ES2429290T3 (en) 2006-10-10 2013-11-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Preparation of ribofuranosylpyrimidine nucleosides
MX2009004900A (en) 2006-11-09 2009-05-19 Hoffmann La Roche Thiazole and oxazole-substituted arylamides.
ES2517602T3 (en) 2007-12-17 2014-11-03 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Tetrazol substituted arylamide derivatives and their use as antagonists of purinergic receptors P2X3 and / or P2X2 / 3
WO2009077366A1 (en) 2007-12-17 2009-06-25 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Triazole-substituted arylamide derivatives and their use as p2x3 and /or p2x2/3 purinergic receptor antagonists
WO2009077365A1 (en) 2007-12-17 2009-06-25 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Novel imidazole-substituted arylamides
EP2234976B1 (en) 2007-12-17 2013-04-10 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Novel pyrazole-substituted arylamides
SI2268642T1 (en) 2008-04-23 2015-05-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1' -substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
JP5540087B2 (en) 2009-06-22 2014-07-02 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Novel indoles, indazoles and benzimidazole arylamides as P2X3 and / or P2X2 / 3 antagonists
JP5476467B2 (en) 2009-06-22 2014-04-23 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Novel biphenylpyridine amide and phenylpyridine amide
ES2593405T3 (en) 2009-06-22 2016-12-09 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag New arylamides substituted by benzoxazolone
KR101848099B1 (en) 2009-09-21 2018-04-11 길리애드 사이언시즈, 인코포레이티드 Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1'-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
RU2012122637A (en) 2009-11-14 2013-12-20 Ф.Хоффманн-Ля Рош Аг BIOMARKERS FOR FORECASTING A QUICK RESPONSE TO TREATING HEPATITIS C
BR112012011393A2 (en) 2009-12-02 2017-06-20 Hoffmann La Roche biomarkers for predicting sustained response to hcv treatment
WO2012012465A1 (en) 2010-07-19 2012-01-26 Clarke, Michael, O'neil Hanrahan Methods for the preparation of diasteromerically pure phosphoramidate prodrugs
BR122020020745B8 (en) 2010-07-22 2023-10-31 Gilead Sciences Inc Antiviral compound for the treatment of paramyxoviridae infections and pharmaceutical composition comprising it
CN102850355B (en) * 2011-06-29 2015-02-11 四川大学 9-sulfonyl-9H-purine derivatives, and preparation method and use thereof
ES2597757T3 (en) 2012-05-25 2017-01-20 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uraciles pyroxexetane nucleosides
EA201590943A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2016-01-29 Алиос Биофарма, Инк. SUBSTITUTED NUCLEOSIDES, NUCLEOTIDES AND THEIR ANALOGUES
RU2534613C2 (en) 2013-03-22 2014-11-27 Александр Васильевич Иващенко Alkyl2-{[(2r,3s,5r)-5-(4-amino-2-oxo-2h-pyrimidine-1-yl)- -hydroxy- tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethoxy]-phenoxy-phosphorylamino}-proptonates, nucleoside inhibitors of rna-polymerase hcv ns5b, methods for producing and using them
JP6562908B2 (en) * 2013-10-11 2019-08-21 ヤンセン バイオファーマ インク． Substituted nucleosides, substituted nucleotides and analogs thereof
WO2015095419A1 (en) * 2013-12-18 2015-06-25 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-or nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
TWI698444B (en) 2014-10-29 2020-07-11 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Methods for the preparation of ribosides
JP6491486B2 (en) * 2015-01-29 2019-03-27 学校法人日本大学 8-aza-3,7-dideazaadenine nucleoside derivatives, 8-aza-3,7-dideazaadenine nucleotide derivatives and polynucleotide derivatives and probes
EP3265102A4 (en) 2015-03-06 2018-12-05 ATEA Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-2-modified-n6-substituted purine nucleotides for hcv treatment
ES2909419T3 (en) 2015-09-16 2022-05-06 Gilead Sciences Inc Methods for treating coronaviridae infections
WO2017197036A1 (en) 2016-05-10 2017-11-16 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Spirocyclic degronimers for target protein degradation
CN109641874A (en) 2016-05-10 2019-04-16 C4医药公司 C for target protein degradation3The glutarimide degron body of carbon connection
WO2017197055A1 (en) 2016-05-10 2017-11-16 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic degronimers for target protein degradation
US10202412B2 (en) 2016-07-08 2019-02-12 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β-D-2′-deoxy-2′-substituted-4′-substituted-2-substituted-N6-substituted-6-aminopurinenucleotides for the treatment of paramyxovirus and orthomyxovirus infections
WO2018013937A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'-alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-4'-fluoro-n6-substituted-6-amino-2-substituted purine nucleotides for the treatment of hepatitis c virus infection
EA037868B1 (en) 2016-09-07 2021-05-28 Атеа Фармасьютикалс, Инк. 2'-substituted-n6-substituted purine nucleotides for rna virus treatment
US10537590B2 (en) * 2016-09-30 2020-01-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Cyclic dinucleotide compounds
WO2018144640A1 (en) 2017-02-01 2018-08-09 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleotide hemi-sulfate salt for the treatment of hepatitis c virus
CA3056072C (en) 2017-03-14 2022-08-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating feline coronavirus infections
CA3059777C (en) 2017-05-01 2023-02-21 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (s)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((s)-(((2r,3s,4r,5r)-5-(4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy)(phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US10675296B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-06-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
WO2019200005A1 (en) 2018-04-10 2019-10-17 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of hcv infected patients with cirrhosis
TWI789695B (en) 2020-01-27 2023-01-11 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Methods for treating sars cov-2 infections
US10874687B1 (en) 2020-02-27 2020-12-29 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Highly active compounds against COVID-19
US11613553B2 (en) 2020-03-12 2023-03-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing 1′-cyano nucleosides
WO2021207049A1 (en) 2020-04-06 2021-10-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhalation formulations of 1'-cyano substituted carbanucleoside analogs
KR20230018473A (en) 2020-05-29 2023-02-07 길리애드 사이언시즈, 인코포레이티드 How to treat remdesivir
EP4172160A2 (en) 2020-06-24 2023-05-03 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1'-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof
PE20231983A1 (en) 2020-08-27 2023-12-12 Gilead Sciences Inc COMPOUNDS AND METHODS FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL INFECTIONS
TW202400185A (en) 2022-03-02 2024-01-01 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections

Citations (38)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2476A (en) * 1842-02-28 Machine for cutting meat and other substances
US2479A (en) * 1842-03-04 Machine for sizing papek
US6002A (en) * 1849-01-02 Screw-wrench for grasping cylindrical forms
US6007A (en) * 1849-01-09 Improvement in plows
US8841A (en) * 1852-03-30 Sice-httxieb
US19363A (en) * 1858-02-16 Improved harpoon-and lance
US28013A (en) * 1860-04-24 Improved bullet-ladle
US50229A (en) * 1865-10-03 Improvement in cultivators
US55483A (en) * 1866-06-12 Improvement in pruning-hooks
US60400A (en) * 1866-12-11 Improved folding lounge
US63622A (en) * 1867-04-09 Improvement in power looms
US63658A (en) * 1867-04-09 bobbins
US67901A (en) * 1867-08-20 Washinoton
US67877A (en) * 1867-08-20 Robert hitchcock
US72788A (en) * 1867-12-31 Charles d
US77587A (en) * 1868-05-05 Let i h
US82574A (en) * 1868-09-29 Williams
US83307A (en) * 1868-10-20 Improvement in wash-boilehs
US87873A (en) * 1869-03-16 Perry prettyman
US97461A (en) * 1869-11-30 Improvement in stump-extractors
US97462A (en) * 1869-11-30 Improved rrttit-slicer
US99072A (en) * 1870-01-25 Improvement in shoes for horses
US101535A (en) * 1870-04-05 Improvement in ornamental-scroll type
US102414A (en) * 1870-04-26 Improvement in peat-machines
US110718A (en) * 1871-01-03 Improvement in harvesters
US110717A (en) * 1871-01-03 Improvement in car-wheel molds
US147160A (en) * 1874-02-03 Improvement in seed-planters
US198171A (en) * 1877-12-11 Improvement in the mode of raising cream
US225037A (en) * 1880-03-02 Apparatus for the manufacture of ice
US225029A (en) * 1880-03-02 Magnetic grain-separator
US6340690B1 (en) * 1999-02-22 2002-01-22 Bio-Chem Pharma Inc. Antiviral methods using [1,8]naphthyridine derivatives
US6348587B1 (en) * 1998-02-25 2002-02-19 Emory University 2′-Fluoronucleosides
US6403566B1 (en) * 1998-05-26 2002-06-11 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleosides having bicyclic sugar moiety
US6495677B1 (en) * 2000-02-15 2002-12-17 Kanda S. Ramasamy Nucleoside compounds
US6566365B1 (en) * 1999-11-04 2003-05-20 Biochem Pharma Inc. Method for the treatment of Flaviviridea viral infection using nucleoside analogues
US6573248B2 (en) * 1996-10-16 2003-06-03 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Monocyclic L-nucleosides, analogs and uses thereof
US6660721B2 (en) * 2001-05-23 2003-12-09 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Anti-HCV nucleoside derivatives
US7217815B2 (en) * 2002-01-17 2007-05-15 Valeant Pharmaceuticals North America 2-beta -modified-6-substituted adenosine analogs and their use as antiviral agents

Family Cites Families (110)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3798209A (en) * 1971-06-01 1974-03-19 Icn Pharmaceuticals 1,2,4-triazole nucleosides
US4211771A (en) * 1971-06-01 1980-07-08 Robins Ronald K Treatment of human viral diseases with 1-B-D-ribofuranosyl-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxamide
USRE29835E (en) * 1971-06-01 1978-11-14 Icn Pharmaceuticals 1,2,4-Triazole nucleosides
US4522811A (en) * 1982-07-08 1985-06-11 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Serial injection of muramyldipeptides and liposomes enhances the anti-infective activity of muramyldipeptides
US5055394A (en) * 1983-10-13 1991-10-08 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army Nucleic acid probe and method for the rapid detection of typhoid fever bacteria
US5223263A (en) 1988-07-07 1993-06-29 Vical, Inc. Liponucleotide-containing liposomes
AU8103687A (en) 1986-10-14 1988-05-06 Beckman Instruments, Inc. Improved nucleic acid hybridization technique and kit therefor
JPH03501253A (en) 1987-09-22 1991-03-22 ザ リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ カリフォルニア Liposome-based nucleoside analogs for the treatment of AIDS
US5705363A (en) * 1989-03-02 1998-01-06 The Women's Research Institute Recombinant production of human interferon τ polypeptides and nucleic acids
US5194654A (en) * 1989-11-22 1993-03-16 Vical, Inc. Lipid derivatives of phosphonoacids for liposomal incorporation and method of use
JPH03148278A (en) 1989-11-02 1991-06-25 Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd Novel nucleoside and production thereof
US5026687A (en) * 1990-01-03 1991-06-25 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Treatment of human retroviral infections with 2',3'-dideoxyinosine alone and in combination with other antiviral compounds
US5443965A (en) * 1990-04-06 1995-08-22 Genelabs Incorporated Hepatitis C virus epitopes
WO1991016920A1 (en) 1990-05-07 1991-11-14 Vical, Inc. Lipid prodrugs of salicylate and nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
EP0531452A4 (en) 1990-05-29 1993-06-09 Vical, Inc. Synthesis of glycerol di- and triphosphate derivatives
DE69115694T2 (en) 1990-06-13 1996-10-17 Arnold Glazier PHOSPHORYLATED PRODRUGS
US5372808A (en) * 1990-10-17 1994-12-13 Amgen Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of diseases with consensus interferon while reducing side effect
US5149794A (en) * 1990-11-01 1992-09-22 State Of Oregon Covalent lipid-drug conjugates for drug targeting
US5256641A (en) 1990-11-01 1993-10-26 State Of Oregon Covalent polar lipid-peptide conjugates for immunological targeting
US6100024A (en) * 1991-02-08 2000-08-08 Promega Corporation Methods and compositions for nucleic acid detection by target extension and probe amplification
EP0594677A4 (en) 1991-07-12 1997-09-17 Vical Inc Antiviral liponucleosides: treatment of hepatitis b
TW224053B (en) * 1991-09-13 1994-05-21 Paul B Chretien
JPH05111389A (en) 1991-10-24 1993-05-07 Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co Ltd Novel antiviral agent
US5676942A (en) * 1992-02-10 1997-10-14 Interferon Sciences, Inc. Composition containing human alpha interferon species proteins and method for use thereof
US5610054A (en) * 1992-05-14 1997-03-11 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Enzymatic RNA molecule targeted against Hepatitis C virus
GB9226729D0 (en) * 1992-12-22 1993-02-17 Wellcome Found Therapeutic combination
US5496546A (en) * 1993-02-24 1996-03-05 Jui H. Wang Compositions and methods of application of reactive antiviral polyadenylic acid derivatives
JP3645904B2 (en) * 1993-05-10 2005-05-11 カイロン コーポレイション Method for classification of hepatitis C virus type and reagent used therefor
WO1994026273A1 (en) 1993-05-12 1994-11-24 Hostetler Karl Y Acyclovir derivatives for topical use
EP0773029A4 (en) * 1993-07-19 1997-09-03 Tokyo Tanabe Co Hepatitis c virus proliferation inhibitor
DE4415539C2 (en) * 1994-05-03 1996-08-01 Osama Dr Dr Med Omer Plants with virustatic and antiviral effects
DE4432623A1 (en) * 1994-09-14 1996-03-21 Huels Chemische Werke Ag Process for bleaching aqueous surfactant solutions
US5696277A (en) 1994-11-15 1997-12-09 Karl Y. Hostetler Antiviral prodrugs
JP3786447B2 (en) 1995-03-31 2006-06-14 エーザイ株式会社 Preventive and therapeutic agent for hepatitis C
US5874565A (en) * 1995-08-29 1999-02-23 Washington University Nucleic acids comprising a highly conserved novel 3 terminal sequence element of the hepatitis C virus
WO1997012033A1 (en) 1995-09-27 1997-04-03 Emory University Recombinant hepatitis c virus rna replicase
AU2064297A (en) * 1996-02-29 1997-09-16 Immusol, Inc Hepatitis c virus ribozymes
US5830905A (en) 1996-03-29 1998-11-03 Viropharma Incorporated Compounds, compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C
JP3715027B2 (en) * 1996-05-07 2005-11-09 シスメックス株式会社 Diagnostic agent for hepatitis C virus infection
US5990276A (en) * 1996-05-10 1999-11-23 Schering Corporation Synthetic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
US5891874A (en) * 1996-06-05 1999-04-06 Eli Lilly And Company Anti-viral compound
US5837257A (en) * 1996-07-09 1998-11-17 Sage R&D Use of plant extracts for treatment of HIV, HCV and HBV infections
JP3927630B2 (en) 1996-09-27 2007-06-13 エーザイ・アール・アンド・ディー・マネジメント株式会社 Preventive and therapeutic agents for viral infections
US5922757A (en) * 1996-09-30 1999-07-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Treatment and prevention of hepatic disorders
CN1233254A (en) 1996-10-16 1999-10-27 Icn药品公司 Purine L-nucleosides, analogs and uses thereof
WO1998016657A1 (en) * 1996-10-17 1998-04-23 Chiron Corporation Protease regulator screening assay
DE69709671T2 (en) 1996-10-18 2002-08-22 Vertex Pharma INHIBITORS OF SERINE PROTEASES, ESPECIALLY NS3 PROTEASE OF THE HEPATITIS C VIRUS
GB9623908D0 (en) 1996-11-18 1997-01-08 Hoffmann La Roche Amino acid derivatives
IL119833A (en) * 1996-12-15 2001-01-11 Lavie David Hypericum perforatum extracts for the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of hepatitis
JP2001514508A (en) * 1997-03-05 2001-09-11 ユニバーシティー オブ ワシントン Novel screening method to identify drugs that selectively inhibit hepatitis C virus replication
US6004933A (en) * 1997-04-25 1999-12-21 Cortech Inc. Cysteine protease inhibitors
IL133235A (en) * 1997-06-30 2004-02-19 Merz Pharma Gmbh & Co Kgaa 1-amino-alkylcyclohexane nmda receptor antagonists and pharmaceutical compositions comprising them
AU757072B2 (en) 1997-08-11 2003-01-30 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis C inhibitor peptide analogues
GB9806815D0 (en) 1998-03-30 1998-05-27 Hoffmann La Roche Amino acid derivatives
US6833361B2 (en) * 1998-05-26 2004-12-21 Ribapharm, Inc. Nucleosides having bicyclic sugar moiety
US6492423B1 (en) 1998-07-27 2002-12-10 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare Pangeletti Spa Diketoacid-derivatives as inhibitors of polymerases
US6323180B1 (en) * 1998-08-10 2001-11-27 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
DE19915178A1 (en) 1999-04-03 2000-10-05 Univ Mainz Johannes Gutenberg Hepatitis C virus cell culture system
DE60031282T2 (en) 1999-08-30 2007-05-03 Roche Diagnostics Gmbh 2-AZAPURINE COMPOUNDS AND ITS USE
JP2003523978A (en) * 2000-02-18 2003-08-12 シャイアー・バイオケム・インコーポレイテッド Methods for treating or preventing FLAVIVIRUS infection using nucleoside analogs
JP2003532643A (en) 2000-04-13 2003-11-05 フアーマセツト・リミテツド 3'- or 2'-hydroxymethyl-substituted nucleoside derivatives for treating hepatitis virus infection
MY164523A (en) * 2000-05-23 2017-12-29 Univ Degli Studi Cagliari Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus
CN101099745A (en) * 2000-05-26 2008-01-09 艾登尼科斯（开曼）有限公司 Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses
UA72612C2 (en) 2000-07-06 2005-03-15 Pyrido[2.3-d]pyrimidine and pyrimido[4.5-d]pyrimidine nucleoside analogues, prodrugs and method for inhibiting growth of neoplastic cells
GB0017676D0 (en) 2000-07-19 2000-09-06 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Inhibitors of viral polymerase
AR029851A1 (en) 2000-07-21 2003-07-16 Dendreon Corp NEW PEPTIDES AS INHIBITORS OF NS3-SERINA PROTEASA DEL VIRUS DE HEPATITIS C
BR0112666A (en) 2000-07-21 2003-06-10 Schering Corp Peptides as inhibitors of hepatitis C virus ns3-serine protease
AR034127A1 (en) 2000-07-21 2004-02-04 Schering Corp IMIDAZOLIDINONES AS INHIBITORS OF NS3-SERINA PROTEASA OF THE HEPATITIS C VIRUS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, A METHOD FOR THEIR PREPARATION, AND THE USE OF THE SAME FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
JP2004504407A (en) 2000-07-21 2004-02-12 コルバス・インターナショナル・インコーポレイテッド Novel peptide as NS3-serine protease inhibitor of hepatitis C virus
US20030008841A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2003-01-09 Rene Devos Anti-HCV nucleoside derivatives
WO2002032920A2 (en) * 2000-10-18 2002-04-25 Pharmasset Limited Modified nucleosides for treatment of viral infections and abnormal cellular proliferation
US6650614B1 (en) 2000-10-30 2003-11-18 Cirrus Logic, Inc. Optical disk pickup using current mode signal exchanges and systems and methods using the same
JP3889708B2 (en) 2000-11-20 2007-03-07 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Hepatitis C tripeptide inhibitor
IL155842A0 (en) 2000-12-12 2003-12-23 Schering Corp Diaryl peptides as ns3-serine protease inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
AU2002230764A1 (en) 2000-12-13 2002-06-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Imidazolidinones and their related derivatives as hepatitis c virus ns3 protease inhibitors
AU2002230763A1 (en) 2000-12-13 2008-01-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Inhibitors of hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
BR0116221A (en) * 2000-12-15 2005-09-13 Pharmasset Ltd Antiviral agents for treatment of flaviviridae infections
US7105499B2 (en) * 2001-01-22 2006-09-12 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase
DK1355916T3 (en) * 2001-01-22 2007-05-07 Merck & Co Inc Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase
GB0114286D0 (en) 2001-06-12 2001-08-01 Hoffmann La Roche Nucleoside Derivatives
WO2003026589A2 (en) 2001-09-28 2003-04-03 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus using 4'-modified nucleosides
EP1438054A4 (en) 2001-09-28 2006-07-26 Idenix Cayman Ltd Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses using 4'-modified nucleoside
MY151199A (en) 2001-11-02 2014-04-30 Rigel Pharmaceuticals Inc Substituted diphenyl heterocycles useful for treating hcv infection
WO2003051899A1 (en) 2001-12-17 2003-06-26 Ribapharm Inc. Deazapurine nucleoside libraries and compounds
WO2003062256A1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2003-07-31 Ribapharm Inc. 2'-beta-modified-6-substituted adenosine analogs and their use as antiviral agents
EP1572705A2 (en) 2002-01-17 2005-09-14 Ribapharm, Inc. Sugar modified nucleosides as viral replication inhibitors
WO2003061385A1 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-07-31 Ribapharm Inc. Tricyclic nucleoside library compounds, synthesis, and use as antiviral agents
GB0201179D0 (en) 2002-01-18 2002-03-06 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Therapeutic agents
TWI329105B (en) 2002-02-01 2010-08-21 Rigel Pharmaceuticals Inc 2,4-pyrimidinediamine compounds and their uses
BR0307712A (en) 2002-02-14 2005-05-24 Pharmasset Ltd Compound, composition and use in the treatment of flaviviridae infections and abnormal cell proliferation
JP2005525358A (en) 2002-02-28 2005-08-25 ビオタ インコーポレーティッド Nucleotide mimetics and their prodrugs
US20040002479A1 (en) * 2002-03-12 2004-01-01 Yihan Wang Peptide analogues and uses thereof
RU2004135392A (en) 2002-05-06 2005-06-27 Дженелэбс Текнолоджиз, Инк. (Us) NUCLEOSIDE DERIVATIVES FOR TREATING INFECTIONS CAUSED BY HEPATITIS C VIRUS
JP2005530843A (en) 2002-06-21 2005-10-13 メルク　エンド　カムパニー　インコーポレーテッド Nucleoside derivatives as RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase inhibitors
CA2488484A1 (en) 2002-06-27 2004-01-08 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
EP2332952B1 (en) 2002-06-28 2015-04-29 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified 2' and 3'-nucleoside prodrugs for treating flaviridae infections
EP1525209B1 (en) 2002-06-28 2017-11-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 1'-, 2'- and 3' -modified nucleoside derivatives for treating flaviviridae infections
AU2003248748A1 (en) 2002-06-28 2004-01-19 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2'-c-methyl-3'-o-l-valine ester ribofuranosyl cytidine for treatment of flaviviridae infections
WO2004007512A2 (en) 2002-07-16 2004-01-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
AU2003256619A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2004-02-09 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrrolopyrimidine thionucleoside analogs as antivirals
WO2004013298A2 (en) 2002-08-01 2004-02-12 Pharmasset Ltd. 2',3'-dideoxynucleoside analogues for the treatment or prevention of flavivitridae infections
CA2494340C (en) * 2002-08-01 2012-01-24 Pharmasset Inc. Compounds with the bicyclo[4.2.1]nonane system for the treatment of flaviviridae infections
US20040067877A1 (en) * 2002-08-01 2004-04-08 Schinazi Raymond F. 2', 3'-Dideoxynucleoside analogues for the treatment or prevention of Flaviviridae infections
EP1530569A2 (en) 2002-08-23 2005-05-18 Rigel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridyl substituted heterocycles useful for treating or preventing hcv infection
EA200500584A1 (en) 2002-09-30 2006-02-24 Дженелэбс Текнолоджиз, Инк. NUCLEOSIDE DERIVATIVES FOR THE TREATMENT OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES CAUSED BY THE HEPATITIS C VIRUS
WO2004037159A2 (en) * 2002-10-23 2004-05-06 Obetherapy Biotechnology Compounds, compositions and methods for modulating fat metabolism
US20040152881A1 (en) 2002-11-07 2004-08-05 The Texas A&M University System Process for solubilizing protein
PT1576138T (en) 2002-11-15 2017-05-03 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2'-methyl nucleosides in combination with interferon and flaviviridae mutation
EP2319853B1 (en) 2002-12-12 2014-03-12 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for the production of 2'-branched nucleosides
EP1658302B1 (en) * 2003-07-25 2010-08-25 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Purine nucleoside analogues for treating diseases caused by flaviviridae including hepatitis c

Patent Citations (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US87873A (en) * 1869-03-16 Perry prettyman
US225037A (en) * 1880-03-02 Apparatus for the manufacture of ice
US6002A (en) * 1849-01-02 Screw-wrench for grasping cylindrical forms
US6007A (en) * 1849-01-09 Improvement in plows
US8841A (en) * 1852-03-30 Sice-httxieb
US19363A (en) * 1858-02-16 Improved harpoon-and lance
US28013A (en) * 1860-04-24 Improved bullet-ladle
US50229A (en) * 1865-10-03 Improvement in cultivators
US55483A (en) * 1866-06-12 Improvement in pruning-hooks
US60400A (en) * 1866-12-11 Improved folding lounge
US63622A (en) * 1867-04-09 Improvement in power looms
US63658A (en) * 1867-04-09 bobbins
US67901A (en) * 1867-08-20 Washinoton
US97462A (en) * 1869-11-30 Improved rrttit-slicer
US72788A (en) * 1867-12-31 Charles d
US77587A (en) * 1868-05-05 Let i h
US82574A (en) * 1868-09-29 Williams
US83307A (en) * 1868-10-20 Improvement in wash-boilehs
US2476A (en) * 1842-02-28 Machine for cutting meat and other substances
US97461A (en) * 1869-11-30 Improvement in stump-extractors
US67877A (en) * 1867-08-20 Robert hitchcock
US99072A (en) * 1870-01-25 Improvement in shoes for horses
US101535A (en) * 1870-04-05 Improvement in ornamental-scroll type
US102414A (en) * 1870-04-26 Improvement in peat-machines
US110718A (en) * 1871-01-03 Improvement in harvesters
US110717A (en) * 1871-01-03 Improvement in car-wheel molds
US147160A (en) * 1874-02-03 Improvement in seed-planters
US198171A (en) * 1877-12-11 Improvement in the mode of raising cream
US2479A (en) * 1842-03-04 Machine for sizing papek
US225029A (en) * 1880-03-02 Magnetic grain-separator
US6573248B2 (en) * 1996-10-16 2003-06-03 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Monocyclic L-nucleosides, analogs and uses thereof
US6348587B1 (en) * 1998-02-25 2002-02-19 Emory University 2′-Fluoronucleosides
US6403566B1 (en) * 1998-05-26 2002-06-11 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleosides having bicyclic sugar moiety
US6340690B1 (en) * 1999-02-22 2002-01-22 Bio-Chem Pharma Inc. Antiviral methods using [1,8]naphthyridine derivatives
US6605614B2 (en) * 1999-02-22 2003-08-12 Biochem Pharma Inc. [1,8] naphthyridine derivatives having antiviral activity
US6566365B1 (en) * 1999-11-04 2003-05-20 Biochem Pharma Inc. Method for the treatment of Flaviviridea viral infection using nucleoside analogues
US6495677B1 (en) * 2000-02-15 2002-12-17 Kanda S. Ramasamy Nucleoside compounds
US6660721B2 (en) * 2001-05-23 2003-12-09 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Anti-HCV nucleoside derivatives
US7217815B2 (en) * 2002-01-17 2007-05-15 Valeant Pharmaceuticals North America 2-beta -modified-6-substituted adenosine analogs and their use as antiviral agents

Cited By (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090036666A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2009-02-05 Pharmasset, Inc. Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US10287311B2 (en) 2003-05-30 2019-05-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US8415322B2 (en) 2003-05-30 2013-04-09 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US20080070861A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2008-03-20 Pharmasset, Inc. Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US20050009737A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2005-01-13 Jeremy Clark Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
US20100234585A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2010-09-16 Pharmasset, Inc. Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-d-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US8481713B2 (en) 2004-07-21 2013-07-09 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-D-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20060199783A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2006-09-07 Pharmassett, Inc. Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-D-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20100048917A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2010-02-25 Pharmassett, Inc. Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-d-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US10577359B2 (en) 2004-09-14 2020-03-03 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Preparation of 2′-fluoro-2′-alkyl-substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20060122146A1 (en) * 2004-09-14 2006-06-08 Byoung-Kwon Chun Preparation of 2'-fluoro-2'-alkyl-substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US8492539B2 (en) 2004-09-14 2013-07-23 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Preparation of 2′-fluoro-2′-alkyl-substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
US20100028922A1 (en) * 2006-08-25 2010-02-04 Wyeth Identification and characterization of hcv replicon variants with reduced susceptibility to benzofurans, and methods related thereto
US20080182895A1 (en) * 2006-08-25 2008-07-31 Howe Anita Y M Identification and characterization of hcv replicon variants with reduced susceptibility to hcv-796, and methods related thereto
US9085573B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2015-07-21 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US8957046B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2015-02-17 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US8906880B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2014-12-09 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US8735372B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2014-05-27 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US7964580B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2011-06-21 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US11642361B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2023-05-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US20100016251A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2010-01-21 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US10183037B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2019-01-22 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US8580765B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2013-11-12 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
US9585906B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2017-03-07 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
WO2009069095A3 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-12-23 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Antiviral nucleoside compounds
US8063025B2 (en) 2007-11-29 2011-11-22 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Nucleoside prodrugs and uses thereof
CN102164939A (en) * 2007-11-29 2011-08-24 配体制药公司 Antiviral nucleoside compounds
US20090209481A1 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-08-20 Roche Palo Alto Llc Nucleoside prodrugs and uses thereof
US8759510B2 (en) 2008-06-11 2014-06-24 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US20100081628A1 (en) * 2008-06-11 2010-04-01 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US8173621B2 (en) 2008-06-11 2012-05-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US9045520B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2015-06-02 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8716262B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8716263B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8551973B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-10-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside analogs
US8957045B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2015-02-17 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8642756B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2014-02-04 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8633309B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2014-01-21 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8618076B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2013-12-31 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8629263B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2014-01-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US9206217B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2015-12-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US9284342B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2016-03-15 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8735569B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2014-05-27 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US9637512B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2017-05-02 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8563530B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2013-10-22 Gilead Pharmassel LLC Purine nucleoside phosphoramidate
US8859756B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2014-10-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Stereoselective synthesis of phosphorus containing actives
US9394331B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2016-07-19 Gilead Pharmasset Llc 2′-spiro-nucleosides and derivatives thereof useful for treating hepatitis C virus and dengue virus infections
US8841275B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2014-09-23 Gilead Pharmasset Llc 2′-spiro-nucleosides and derivatives thereof useful for treating hepatitis C virus and dengue virus infections
US9393256B2 (en) 2011-09-16 2016-07-19 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Methods for treating HCV
US10456414B2 (en) 2011-09-16 2019-10-29 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Methods for treating HCV
US8889159B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2014-11-18 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Compositions and methods for treating hepatitis C virus
US9549941B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2017-01-24 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Compositions and methods for treating hepatitis C virus
US10039779B2 (en) 2013-01-31 2018-08-07 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
US11116783B2 (en) 2013-08-27 2021-09-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
US11707479B2 (en) 2013-08-27 2023-07-25 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
US10449210B2 (en) 2014-02-13 2019-10-22 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Inc. Prodrug compounds and their uses
US11278559B2 (en) 2014-02-13 2022-03-22 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Prodrug compounds and their uses
US10150788B2 (en) 2014-07-02 2018-12-11 Ligand Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Prodrug compounds and uses thereof
US9994600B2 (en) 2014-07-02 2018-06-12 Ligand Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Prodrug compounds and uses therof
CN109384727A (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-26 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Phthalazines ketone compounds, preparation method, pharmaceutical composition and purposes

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2007501185A (en) 2007-01-25
ES2351603T3 (en) 2011-02-08
US20090169507A1 (en) 2009-07-02
KR20060084845A (en) 2006-07-25
US20140234251A1 (en) 2014-08-21
US8742101B2 (en) 2014-06-03
DK1658302T3 (en) 2010-11-22
CN1852915A (en) 2006-10-25
US9186369B2 (en) 2015-11-17
CA2533367A1 (en) 2005-02-03
NO20060914L (en) 2006-04-25
CA2533367C (en) 2013-10-01
EP1658302B1 (en) 2010-08-25
DE602004028841D1 (en) 2010-10-07
AU2004258750A1 (en) 2005-02-03
BRPI0412849A (en) 2006-09-26
PT1658302E (en) 2010-10-25
EP1658302A2 (en) 2006-05-24
PL1658302T3 (en) 2011-03-31
ATE478886T1 (en) 2010-09-15
WO2005009418A2 (en) 2005-02-03
WO2005009418A3 (en) 2005-04-07
RU2006105640A (en) 2007-09-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9186369B2 (en) Purine nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis C
AU2003257157C1 (en) Compounds with the bicyclo[4.2.1] nonane system for the treatment of Flaviviridae infections
US20170088577A1 (en) Modified 2&#39; and 3&#39;-nucleoside prodrugs for treating flaviviridae infections
US20100279974A1 (en) Nucleosides With Non-Natural Bases as Anti-Viral Agents
US20060040944A1 (en) 5-Aza-7-deazapurine derivatives for treating Flaviviridae
CA2581523A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses, pestiviruses and hepacivirus
AU2004253860A2 (en) Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
MXPA04012802A (en) 2aCOE-C-METHYL-3aCOE-O-L-VALINE ESTER RIBOFURANOSYL CYTIDINE FOR TREATMENT OF FLAVIVIRIDAE INFECTIONS.
WO2004096197A2 (en) 5-aza-7-deazapurine nucleosides for treating flaviviridae
MXPA06001017A (en) Purin nucleoside analogues for treating flaviviridae including hepatitis c
MX2007003039A (en) Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses, pestiviruses and hepacivirus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GOSSELIN, GILLES;DUKHAN, DAVID;LEROY, FREDERIC;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:020956/0192;SIGNING DATES FROM 20080226 TO 20080422

AS Assignment

Owner name: CENTRE NATIONAL DA LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE (CNRS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:GOSSELIN, GILLES;REEL/FRAME:022122/0462

Effective date: 20080226

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ERRONEOUS ASSIGNMENT OF GILLES GOSSELIN TO IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 020956 FRAME 0192;ASSIGNORS:STORER, RICHARD;DUKHAN, DAVID;LEROY, FREDERICK;REEL/FRAME:022122/0628;SIGNING DATES FROM 20080317 TO 20080422

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.;IDENIX SARL;IDENIX (CAYMAN) LIMITED;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:022646/0123

Effective date: 20090304

Owner name: THE CENTRE NATIONAL DEL LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFICQUE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.;IDENIX SARL;IDENIX (CAYMAN) LIMITED;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:022646/0123

Effective date: 20090304

Owner name: L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II, FRANCE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.;IDENIX SARL;IDENIX (CAYMAN) LIMITED;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:022646/0123

Effective date: 20090304